diff options
127 files changed, 1497 insertions, 1411 deletions
diff --git a/contrib/dblink/dblink.c b/contrib/dblink/dblink.c index 04354e16b8..4bfa7670fd 100644 --- a/contrib/dblink/dblink.c +++ b/contrib/dblink/dblink.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Darko Prenosil <Darko.Prenosil@finteh.hr> * Shridhar Daithankar <shridhar_daithankar@persistent.co.in> * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/dblink/dblink.c,v 1.98 2010/06/15 20:29:01 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/dblink/dblink.c,v 1.99 2010/07/06 19:18:54 momjian Exp $ * Copyright (c) 2001-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * ALL RIGHTS RESERVED; * @@ -1797,7 +1797,7 @@ get_sql_delete(Relation rel, int *pkattnums, int pknumatts, char **tgt_pkattvals appendStringInfo(&buf, " AND "); appendStringInfoString(&buf, - quote_ident_cstr(NameStr(tupdesc->attrs[pkattnum]->attname))); + quote_ident_cstr(NameStr(tupdesc->attrs[pkattnum]->attname))); if (tgt_pkattvals[i] != NULL) appendStringInfo(&buf, " = %s", @@ -1880,7 +1880,7 @@ get_sql_update(Relation rel, int *pkattnums, int pknumatts, char **src_pkattvals appendStringInfo(&buf, " AND "); appendStringInfo(&buf, "%s", - quote_ident_cstr(NameStr(tupdesc->attrs[pkattnum]->attname))); + quote_ident_cstr(NameStr(tupdesc->attrs[pkattnum]->attname))); val = tgt_pkattvals[i]; @@ -1976,8 +1976,8 @@ get_tuple_of_interest(Relation rel, int *pkattnums, int pknumatts, char **src_pk * Build sql statement to look up tuple of interest, ie, the one matching * src_pkattvals. We used to use "SELECT *" here, but it's simpler to * generate a result tuple that matches the table's physical structure, - * with NULLs for any dropped columns. Otherwise we have to deal with - * two different tupdescs and everything's very confusing. + * with NULLs for any dropped columns. Otherwise we have to deal with two + * different tupdescs and everything's very confusing. */ appendStringInfoString(&buf, "SELECT "); @@ -1990,7 +1990,7 @@ get_tuple_of_interest(Relation rel, int *pkattnums, int pknumatts, char **src_pk appendStringInfoString(&buf, "NULL"); else appendStringInfoString(&buf, - quote_ident_cstr(NameStr(tupdesc->attrs[i]->attname))); + quote_ident_cstr(NameStr(tupdesc->attrs[i]->attname))); } appendStringInfo(&buf, " FROM %s WHERE ", relname); @@ -2003,7 +2003,7 @@ get_tuple_of_interest(Relation rel, int *pkattnums, int pknumatts, char **src_pk appendStringInfo(&buf, " AND "); appendStringInfoString(&buf, - quote_ident_cstr(NameStr(tupdesc->attrs[pkattnum]->attname))); + quote_ident_cstr(NameStr(tupdesc->attrs[pkattnum]->attname))); if (src_pkattvals[i] != NULL) appendStringInfo(&buf, " = %s", @@ -2417,9 +2417,9 @@ validate_pkattnums(Relation rel, /* Validate attnums and convert to internal form */ for (i = 0; i < pknumatts_arg; i++) { - int pkattnum = pkattnums_arg->values[i]; - int lnum; - int j; + int pkattnum = pkattnums_arg->values[i]; + int lnum; + int j; /* Can throw error immediately if out of range */ if (pkattnum <= 0 || pkattnum > natts) diff --git a/contrib/fuzzystrmatch/dmetaphone.c b/contrib/fuzzystrmatch/dmetaphone.c index c84e70ac48..f23a3a2aa6 100644 --- a/contrib/fuzzystrmatch/dmetaphone.c +++ b/contrib/fuzzystrmatch/dmetaphone.c @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ /* * This is a port of the Double Metaphone algorithm for use in PostgreSQL. * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/fuzzystrmatch/dmetaphone.c,v 1.14 2010/04/05 02:46:20 adunstan Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/fuzzystrmatch/dmetaphone.c,v 1.15 2010/07/06 19:18:55 momjian Exp $ * * Double Metaphone computes 2 "sounds like" strings - a primary and an * alternate. In most cases they are the same, but for foreign names @@ -461,7 +461,7 @@ DoubleMetaphone(char *str, char **codes) current += 1; break; - case '\xc7': /* C with cedilla */ + case '\xc7': /* C with cedilla */ MetaphAdd(primary, "S"); MetaphAdd(secondary, "S"); current += 1; @@ -1037,7 +1037,7 @@ DoubleMetaphone(char *str, char **codes) MetaphAdd(secondary, "N"); break; - case '\xd1': /* N with tilde */ + case '\xd1': /* N with tilde */ current += 1; MetaphAdd(primary, "N"); MetaphAdd(secondary, "N"); diff --git a/contrib/pg_archivecleanup/pg_archivecleanup.c b/contrib/pg_archivecleanup/pg_archivecleanup.c index 704fd78c88..0f53b4d439 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_archivecleanup/pg_archivecleanup.c +++ b/contrib/pg_archivecleanup/pg_archivecleanup.c @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ /* - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_archivecleanup/pg_archivecleanup.c,v 1.2 2010/06/17 17:31:27 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_archivecleanup/pg_archivecleanup.c,v 1.3 2010/07/06 19:18:55 momjian Exp $ * * pg_archivecleanup.c * @@ -40,8 +40,9 @@ bool debug = false; /* are we debugging? */ char *archiveLocation; /* where to find the archive? */ char *restartWALFileName; /* the file from which we can restart restore */ char WALFilePath[MAXPGPATH]; /* the file path including archive */ -char exclusiveCleanupFileName[MAXPGPATH]; /* the oldest file we want to - * remain in archive */ +char exclusiveCleanupFileName[MAXPGPATH]; /* the oldest file we + * want to remain in + * archive */ /* ===================================================================== @@ -68,14 +69,14 @@ char exclusiveCleanupFileName[MAXPGPATH]; /* the oldest file we want to /* * Initialize allows customized commands into the archive cleanup program. * - * You may wish to add code to check for tape libraries, etc.. + * You may wish to add code to check for tape libraries, etc.. */ static void Initialize(void) { /* - * This code assumes that archiveLocation is a directory, so we use - * stat to test if it's accessible. + * This code assumes that archiveLocation is a directory, so we use stat + * to test if it's accessible. */ struct stat stat_buf; @@ -100,22 +101,21 @@ CleanupPriorWALFiles(void) while ((xlde = readdir(xldir)) != NULL) { /* - * We ignore the timeline part of the XLOG segment identifiers - * in deciding whether a segment is still needed. This - * ensures that we won't prematurely remove a segment from a - * parent timeline. We could probably be a little more - * proactive about removing segments of non-parent timelines, - * but that would be a whole lot more complicated. + * We ignore the timeline part of the XLOG segment identifiers in + * deciding whether a segment is still needed. This ensures that + * we won't prematurely remove a segment from a parent timeline. + * We could probably be a little more proactive about removing + * segments of non-parent timelines, but that would be a whole lot + * more complicated. * - * We use the alphanumeric sorting property of the filenames - * to decide which ones are earlier than the - * exclusiveCleanupFileName file. Note that this means files - * are not removed in the order they were originally written, - * in case this worries you. + * We use the alphanumeric sorting property of the filenames to + * decide which ones are earlier than the exclusiveCleanupFileName + * file. Note that this means files are not removed in the order + * they were originally written, in case this worries you. */ if (strlen(xlde->d_name) == XLOG_DATA_FNAME_LEN && - strspn(xlde->d_name, "0123456789ABCDEF") == XLOG_DATA_FNAME_LEN && - strcmp(xlde->d_name + 8, exclusiveCleanupFileName + 8) < 0) + strspn(xlde->d_name, "0123456789ABCDEF") == XLOG_DATA_FNAME_LEN && + strcmp(xlde->d_name + 8, exclusiveCleanupFileName + 8) < 0) { #ifdef WIN32 snprintf(WALFilePath, MAXPGPATH, "%s\\%s", archiveLocation, xlde->d_name); @@ -152,13 +152,13 @@ CleanupPriorWALFiles(void) static void SetWALFileNameForCleanup(void) { - bool fnameOK = false; + bool fnameOK = false; /* - * If restartWALFileName is a WAL file name then just use it directly. - * If restartWALFileName is a .backup filename, make sure we use - * the prefix of the filename, otherwise we will remove wrong files - * since 000000010000000000000010.00000020.backup is after + * If restartWALFileName is a WAL file name then just use it directly. If + * restartWALFileName is a .backup filename, make sure we use the prefix + * of the filename, otherwise we will remove wrong files since + * 000000010000000000000010.00000020.backup is after * 000000010000000000000010. */ if (strlen(restartWALFileName) == XLOG_DATA_FNAME_LEN && @@ -169,17 +169,20 @@ SetWALFileNameForCleanup(void) } else if (strlen(restartWALFileName) == XLOG_BACKUP_FNAME_LEN) { - int args; + int args; uint32 tli = 1, log = 0, seg = 0, offset = 0; + args = sscanf(restartWALFileName, "%08X%08X%08X.%08X.backup", &tli, &log, &seg, &offset); if (args == 4) { fnameOK = true; + /* - * Use just the prefix of the filename, ignore everything after first period + * Use just the prefix of the filename, ignore everything after + * first period */ XLogFileName(exclusiveCleanupFileName, tli, log, seg); } @@ -205,12 +208,12 @@ usage(void) printf("Usage:\n"); printf(" %s [OPTION]... ARCHIVELOCATION OLDESTKEPTWALFILE\n", progname); printf("\n" - "for use as an archive_cleanup_command in the recovery.conf when standby_mode = on:\n" + "for use as an archive_cleanup_command in the recovery.conf when standby_mode = on:\n" " archive_cleanup_command = 'pg_archivecleanup [OPTION]... ARCHIVELOCATION %%r'\n" "e.g.\n" " archive_cleanup_command = 'pg_archivecleanup /mnt/server/archiverdir %%r'\n"); printf("\n" - "or for use as a standalone archive cleaner:\n" + "or for use as a standalone archive cleaner:\n" "e.g.\n" " pg_archivecleanup /mnt/server/archiverdir 000000010000000000000010.00000020.backup\n"); printf("\nOptions:\n"); @@ -258,9 +261,10 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) /* * We will go to the archiveLocation to check restartWALFileName. - * restartWALFileName may not exist anymore, which would not be an error, so - * we separate the archiveLocation and restartWALFileName so we can check - * separately whether archiveLocation exists, if not that is an error + * restartWALFileName may not exist anymore, which would not be an error, + * so we separate the archiveLocation and restartWALFileName so we can + * check separately whether archiveLocation exists, if not that is an + * error */ if (optind < argc) { diff --git a/contrib/pg_upgrade/check.c b/contrib/pg_upgrade/check.c index e916e2a5a8..0e96705b2d 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_upgrade/check.c +++ b/contrib/pg_upgrade/check.c @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ * server checks and output routines * * Copyright (c) 2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_upgrade/check.c,v 1.10 2010/07/03 16:33:14 momjian Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_upgrade/check.c,v 1.11 2010/07/06 19:18:55 momjian Exp $ */ #include "pg_upgrade.h" @@ -152,8 +152,8 @@ issue_warnings(migratorContext *ctx, char *sequence_script_file_name) { prep_status(ctx, "Adjusting sequences"); exec_prog(ctx, true, - SYSTEMQUOTE "\"%s/psql\" --set ON_ERROR_STOP=on --port %d " - "--username \"%s\" -f \"%s\" --dbname template1 >> \"%s\"" + SYSTEMQUOTE "\"%s/psql\" --set ON_ERROR_STOP=on --port %d " + "--username \"%s\" -f \"%s\" --dbname template1 >> \"%s\"" SYSTEMQUOTE, ctx->new.bindir, ctx->new.port, ctx->user, sequence_script_file_name, ctx->logfile); @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ check_cluster_versions(migratorContext *ctx) /* Only current PG version is supported as a target */ if (GET_MAJOR_VERSION(ctx->new.major_version) != GET_MAJOR_VERSION(PG_VERSION_NUM)) pg_log(ctx, PG_FATAL, "This utility can only upgrade to PostgreSQL version %s.\n", - PG_MAJORVERSION); + PG_MAJORVERSION); /* * We can't allow downgrading because we use the target pg_dumpall, and @@ -375,7 +375,7 @@ check_new_db_is_empty(migratorContext *ctx) */ void create_script_for_old_cluster_deletion(migratorContext *ctx, - char **deletion_script_file_name) + char **deletion_script_file_name) { FILE *script = NULL; int tblnum; @@ -389,7 +389,7 @@ create_script_for_old_cluster_deletion(migratorContext *ctx, if ((script = fopen(*deletion_script_file_name, "w")) == NULL) pg_log(ctx, PG_FATAL, "Could not create necessary file: %s\n", - *deletion_script_file_name); + *deletion_script_file_name); #ifndef WIN32 /* add shebang header */ @@ -420,6 +420,7 @@ create_script_for_old_cluster_deletion(migratorContext *ctx, } } else + /* * Simply delete the tablespace directory, which might be ".old" * or a version-specific subdirectory. @@ -433,7 +434,7 @@ create_script_for_old_cluster_deletion(migratorContext *ctx, #ifndef WIN32 if (chmod(*deletion_script_file_name, S_IRWXU) != 0) pg_log(ctx, PG_FATAL, "Could not add execute permission to file: %s\n", - *deletion_script_file_name); + *deletion_script_file_name); #endif check_ok(ctx); diff --git a/contrib/pg_upgrade/controldata.c b/contrib/pg_upgrade/controldata.c index b84b3da2af..18c1e89f4b 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_upgrade/controldata.c +++ b/contrib/pg_upgrade/controldata.c @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ * controldata functions * * Copyright (c) 2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_upgrade/controldata.c,v 1.8 2010/07/03 16:33:14 momjian Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_upgrade/controldata.c,v 1.9 2010/07/06 19:18:55 momjian Exp $ */ #include "pg_upgrade.h" @@ -93,6 +93,7 @@ get_control_data(migratorContext *ctx, ClusterInfo *cluster, bool live_check) fputs(bufin, ctx->debug_fd); #ifdef WIN32 + /* * Due to an installer bug, LANG=C doesn't work for PG 8.3.3, but does * work 8.2.6 and 8.3.7, so check for non-ASCII output and suggest a diff --git a/contrib/pg_upgrade/dump.c b/contrib/pg_upgrade/dump.c index 9fe9296031..3a2ded629c 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_upgrade/dump.c +++ b/contrib/pg_upgrade/dump.c @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ * dump functions * * Copyright (c) 2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_upgrade/dump.c,v 1.6 2010/07/03 16:33:14 momjian Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_upgrade/dump.c,v 1.7 2010/07/06 19:18:55 momjian Exp $ */ #include "pg_upgrade.h" @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ generate_old_dump(migratorContext *ctx) exec_prog(ctx, true, SYSTEMQUOTE "\"%s/pg_dumpall\" --port %d --username \"%s\" " "--schema-only --binary-upgrade > \"%s/" ALL_DUMP_FILE "\"" - SYSTEMQUOTE, ctx->new.bindir, ctx->old.port, ctx->user, ctx->cwd); + SYSTEMQUOTE, ctx->new.bindir, ctx->old.port, ctx->user, ctx->cwd); check_ok(ctx); } diff --git a/contrib/pg_upgrade/exec.c b/contrib/pg_upgrade/exec.c index 9eaab2fbdf..88a2129e89 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_upgrade/exec.c +++ b/contrib/pg_upgrade/exec.c @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ * execution functions * * Copyright (c) 2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_upgrade/exec.c,v 1.7 2010/07/03 16:33:14 momjian Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_upgrade/exec.c,v 1.8 2010/07/06 19:18:55 momjian Exp $ */ #include "pg_upgrade.h" @@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ static void checkBinDir(migratorContext *ctx, ClusterInfo *cluster); -static int check_exec(migratorContext *ctx, const char *dir, const char *cmdName); +static int check_exec(migratorContext *ctx, const char *dir, const char *cmdName); static const char *validate_exec(const char *path); static int check_data_dir(migratorContext *ctx, const char *pg_data); @@ -311,5 +311,3 @@ check_data_dir(migratorContext *ctx, const char *pg_data) return (fail) ? -1 : 0; } - - diff --git a/contrib/pg_upgrade/file.c b/contrib/pg_upgrade/file.c index af72d0458a..7ddaddafd6 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_upgrade/file.c +++ b/contrib/pg_upgrade/file.c @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ * file system operations * * Copyright (c) 2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_upgrade/file.c,v 1.12 2010/07/03 16:33:14 momjian Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_upgrade/file.c,v 1.13 2010/07/06 19:18:55 momjian Exp $ */ #include "pg_upgrade.h" @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ copy_file(const char *srcfile, const char *dstfile, bool force) */ int pg_scandir(migratorContext *ctx, const char *dirname, - struct dirent ***namelist, + struct dirent *** namelist, int (*selector) (const struct dirent *)) { #ifndef HAVE_SCANDIR @@ -235,13 +235,14 @@ pg_scandir(migratorContext *ctx, const char *dirname, /* * scandir() is originally from BSD 4.3, which had the third argument as * non-const. Linux and other C libraries have updated it to use a const. - * http://unix.derkeiler.com/Mailing-Lists/FreeBSD/questions/2005-12/msg00214.html + * http://unix.derkeiler.com/Mailing-Lists/FreeBSD/questions/2005-12/msg002 + * 14.html * * Here we try to guess which libc's need const, and which don't. The net * goal here is to try to suppress a compiler warning due to a prototype * mismatch of const usage. Ideally we would do this via autoconf, but - * autoconf doesn't have a suitable builtin test and it seems overkill - * to add one just to avoid a warning. + * autoconf doesn't have a suitable builtin test and it seems overkill to + * add one just to avoid a warning. */ #elif defined(__FreeBSD__) || defined(__bsdi__) || defined(__darwin__) || defined(__OpenBSD__) /* no const */ diff --git a/contrib/pg_upgrade/info.c b/contrib/pg_upgrade/info.c index 8a962fa604..dad2a5f8d1 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_upgrade/info.c +++ b/contrib/pg_upgrade/info.c @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ * information support functions * * Copyright (c) 2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_upgrade/info.c,v 1.10 2010/07/03 16:33:14 momjian Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_upgrade/info.c,v 1.11 2010/07/06 19:18:55 momjian Exp $ */ #include "pg_upgrade.h" @@ -18,12 +18,12 @@ static void dbarr_print(migratorContext *ctx, DbInfoArr *arr, Cluster whichCluster); static void relarr_print(migratorContext *ctx, RelInfoArr *arr); static void get_rel_infos(migratorContext *ctx, const DbInfo *dbinfo, - RelInfoArr *relarr, Cluster whichCluster); + RelInfoArr *relarr, Cluster whichCluster); static void relarr_free(RelInfoArr *rel_arr); static void map_rel(migratorContext *ctx, const RelInfo *oldrel, - const RelInfo *newrel, const DbInfo *old_db, - const DbInfo *new_db, const char *olddata, - const char *newdata, FileNameMap *map); + const RelInfo *newrel, const DbInfo *old_db, + const DbInfo *new_db, const char *olddata, + const char *newdata, FileNameMap *map); static void map_rel_by_id(migratorContext *ctx, Oid oldid, Oid newid, const char *old_nspname, const char *old_relname, const char *new_nspname, const char *new_relname, @@ -31,10 +31,10 @@ static void map_rel_by_id(migratorContext *ctx, Oid oldid, Oid newid, const DbInfo *new_db, const char *olddata, const char *newdata, FileNameMap *map); static RelInfo *relarr_lookup_reloid(migratorContext *ctx, - RelInfoArr *rel_arr, Oid oid, Cluster whichCluster); + RelInfoArr *rel_arr, Oid oid, Cluster whichCluster); static RelInfo *relarr_lookup_rel(migratorContext *ctx, RelInfoArr *rel_arr, - const char *nspname, const char *relname, - Cluster whichCluster); + const char *nspname, const char *relname, + Cluster whichCluster); /* @@ -226,13 +226,13 @@ get_db_infos(migratorContext *ctx, DbInfoArr *dbinfs_arr, Cluster whichCluster) int i_oid; int i_spclocation; - res = executeQueryOrDie(ctx, conn, - "SELECT d.oid, d.datname, t.spclocation " - "FROM pg_catalog.pg_database d " - " LEFT OUTER JOIN pg_catalog.pg_tablespace t " - " ON d.dattablespace = t.oid " - "WHERE d.datallowconn = true"); - + res = executeQueryOrDie(ctx, conn, + "SELECT d.oid, d.datname, t.spclocation " + "FROM pg_catalog.pg_database d " + " LEFT OUTER JOIN pg_catalog.pg_tablespace t " + " ON d.dattablespace = t.oid " + "WHERE d.datallowconn = true"); + i_datname = PQfnumber(res, "datname"); i_oid = PQfnumber(res, "oid"); i_spclocation = PQfnumber(res, "spclocation"); @@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ get_rel_infos(migratorContext *ctx, const DbInfo *dbinfo, for (relnum = 0; relnum < ntups; relnum++) { RelInfo *curr = &relinfos[num_rels++]; - const char *tblspace; + const char *tblspace; curr->reloid = atol(PQgetvalue(res, relnum, i_oid)); diff --git a/contrib/pg_upgrade/option.c b/contrib/pg_upgrade/option.c index 65da7627a5..1704069b34 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_upgrade/option.c +++ b/contrib/pg_upgrade/option.c @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ * options functions * * Copyright (c) 2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_upgrade/option.c,v 1.11 2010/07/03 16:33:14 momjian Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_upgrade/option.c,v 1.12 2010/07/06 19:18:55 momjian Exp $ */ #include "pg_upgrade.h" @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ parseCommandLine(migratorContext *ctx, int argc, char *argv[]) int option; /* Command line option */ int optindex = 0; /* used by getopt_long */ int user_id; - + if (getenv("PGUSER")) { pg_free(ctx->user); @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ parseCommandLine(migratorContext *ctx, int argc, char *argv[]) /* user lookup and 'root' test must be split because of usage() */ user_id = get_user_info(ctx, &ctx->user); - + if (argc > 1) { if (strcmp(argv[1], "--help") == 0 || strcmp(argv[1], "-h") == 0 || @@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ validateDirectoryOption(migratorContext *ctx, char **dirpath, if ((*dirpath)[strlen(*dirpath) - 1] == '/') #else if ((*dirpath)[strlen(*dirpath) - 1] == '/' || - (*dirpath)[strlen(*dirpath) - 1] == '\\') + (*dirpath)[strlen(*dirpath) - 1] == '\\') #endif (*dirpath)[strlen(*dirpath) - 1] = 0; } diff --git a/contrib/pg_upgrade/pg_upgrade.c b/contrib/pg_upgrade/pg_upgrade.c index 3aba3884b1..695596ba60 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_upgrade/pg_upgrade.c +++ b/contrib/pg_upgrade/pg_upgrade.c @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ * main source file * * Copyright (c) 2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_upgrade/pg_upgrade.c,v 1.9 2010/07/03 16:33:14 momjian Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_upgrade/pg_upgrade.c,v 1.10 2010/07/06 19:18:55 momjian Exp $ */ #include "pg_upgrade.h" @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) */ prep_status(&ctx, "Setting next oid for new cluster"); exec_prog(&ctx, true, SYSTEMQUOTE "\"%s/pg_resetxlog\" -o %u \"%s\" > " - DEVNULL SYSTEMQUOTE, + DEVNULL SYSTEMQUOTE, ctx.new.bindir, ctx.old.controldata.chkpnt_nxtoid, ctx.new.pgdata); check_ok(&ctx); @@ -166,10 +166,10 @@ prepare_new_cluster(migratorContext *ctx) check_ok(ctx); /* - * We do freeze after analyze so pg_statistic is also frozen. - * template0 is not frozen here, but data rows were frozen by initdb, - * and we set its datfrozenxid and relfrozenxids later to match the - * new xid counter later. + * We do freeze after analyze so pg_statistic is also frozen. template0 is + * not frozen here, but data rows were frozen by initdb, and we set its + * datfrozenxid and relfrozenxids later to match the new xid counter + * later. */ prep_status(ctx, "Freezing all rows on the new cluster"); exec_prog(ctx, true, @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ prepare_new_databases(migratorContext *ctx) prep_status(ctx, "Creating databases in the new cluster"); exec_prog(ctx, true, SYSTEMQUOTE "\"%s/psql\" --port %d --username \"%s\" " - "--set ON_ERROR_STOP=on -f \"%s/%s\" --dbname template1 >> \"%s\"" + "--set ON_ERROR_STOP=on -f \"%s/%s\" --dbname template1 >> \"%s\"" SYSTEMQUOTE, ctx->new.bindir, ctx->new.port, ctx->user, ctx->cwd, GLOBALS_DUMP_FILE, ctx->logfile); @@ -226,9 +226,9 @@ create_new_objects(migratorContext *ctx) prep_status(ctx, "Restoring database schema to new cluster"); exec_prog(ctx, true, SYSTEMQUOTE "\"%s/psql\" --port %d --username \"%s\" " - "--set ON_ERROR_STOP=on -f \"%s/%s\" --dbname template1 >> \"%s\"" + "--set ON_ERROR_STOP=on -f \"%s/%s\" --dbname template1 >> \"%s\"" SYSTEMQUOTE, - ctx->new.bindir, ctx->new.port, ctx->user, ctx->cwd, + ctx->new.bindir, ctx->new.port, ctx->user, ctx->cwd, DB_DUMP_FILE, ctx->logfile); check_ok(ctx); @@ -300,7 +300,8 @@ void set_frozenxids(migratorContext *ctx) { int dbnum; - PGconn *conn, *conn_template1; + PGconn *conn, + *conn_template1; PGresult *dbres; int ntups; int i_datname; @@ -327,21 +328,21 @@ set_frozenxids(migratorContext *ctx) ntups = PQntuples(dbres); for (dbnum = 0; dbnum < ntups; dbnum++) { - char *datname = PQgetvalue(dbres, dbnum, i_datname); - char *datallowconn= PQgetvalue(dbres, dbnum, i_datallowconn); + char *datname = PQgetvalue(dbres, dbnum, i_datname); + char *datallowconn = PQgetvalue(dbres, dbnum, i_datallowconn); /* - * We must update databases where datallowconn = false, e.g. - * template0, because autovacuum increments their datfrozenxids and - * relfrozenxids even if autovacuum is turned off, and even though - * all the data rows are already frozen To enable this, we - * temporarily change datallowconn. + * We must update databases where datallowconn = false, e.g. + * template0, because autovacuum increments their datfrozenxids and + * relfrozenxids even if autovacuum is turned off, and even though all + * the data rows are already frozen To enable this, we temporarily + * change datallowconn. */ if (strcmp(datallowconn, "f") == 0) PQclear(executeQueryOrDie(ctx, conn_template1, - "UPDATE pg_catalog.pg_database " - "SET datallowconn = true " - "WHERE datname = '%s'", datname)); + "UPDATE pg_catalog.pg_database " + "SET datallowconn = true " + "WHERE datname = '%s'", datname)); conn = connectToServer(ctx, datname, CLUSTER_NEW); @@ -357,9 +358,9 @@ set_frozenxids(migratorContext *ctx) /* Reset datallowconn flag */ if (strcmp(datallowconn, "f") == 0) PQclear(executeQueryOrDie(ctx, conn_template1, - "UPDATE pg_catalog.pg_database " - "SET datallowconn = false " - "WHERE datname = '%s'", datname)); + "UPDATE pg_catalog.pg_database " + "SET datallowconn = false " + "WHERE datname = '%s'", datname)); } PQclear(dbres); diff --git a/contrib/pg_upgrade/pg_upgrade.h b/contrib/pg_upgrade/pg_upgrade.h index 1973bfce4e..b80f32778d 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_upgrade/pg_upgrade.h +++ b/contrib/pg_upgrade/pg_upgrade.h @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ * pg_upgrade.h * * Copyright (c) 2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_upgrade/pg_upgrade.h,v 1.14 2010/07/03 16:33:14 momjian Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_upgrade/pg_upgrade.h,v 1.15 2010/07/06 19:18:55 momjian Exp $ */ #include "postgres.h" @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ #define MAX_STRING 1024 #define LINE_ALLOC 4096 #define QUERY_ALLOC 8192 - + #define MIGRATOR_API_VERSION 1 #define MESSAGE_WIDTH "60" @@ -53,19 +53,19 @@ #define CLUSTERNAME(cluster) ((cluster) == CLUSTER_OLD ? "old" : "new") /* OID system catalog preservation added during PG 9.0 development */ -#define TABLE_SPACE_SUBDIRS 201001111 +#define TABLE_SPACE_SUBDIRS 201001111 /* * Each relation is represented by a relinfo structure. */ typedef struct { - char nspname[NAMEDATALEN]; /* namespace name */ - char relname[NAMEDATALEN]; /* relation name */ + char nspname[NAMEDATALEN]; /* namespace name */ + char relname[NAMEDATALEN]; /* relation name */ Oid reloid; /* relation oid */ Oid relfilenode; /* relation relfile node */ Oid toastrelid; /* oid of the toast relation */ - char tablespace[MAXPGPATH]; /* relations tablespace path */ + char tablespace[MAXPGPATH]; /* relations tablespace path */ } RelInfo; typedef struct @@ -83,10 +83,10 @@ typedef struct Oid new; /* Relfilenode of the new relation */ char old_file[MAXPGPATH]; char new_file[MAXPGPATH]; - char old_nspname[NAMEDATALEN]; /* old name of the namespace */ - char old_relname[NAMEDATALEN]; /* old name of the relation */ - char new_nspname[NAMEDATALEN]; /* new name of the namespace */ - char new_relname[NAMEDATALEN]; /* new name of the relation */ + char old_nspname[NAMEDATALEN]; /* old name of the namespace */ + char old_relname[NAMEDATALEN]; /* old name of the relation */ + char new_nspname[NAMEDATALEN]; /* new name of the namespace */ + char new_relname[NAMEDATALEN]; /* new name of the relation */ } FileNameMap; /* @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ typedef enum */ typedef enum { - NONE = 0, /* used for no running servers */ + NONE = 0, /* used for no running servers */ CLUSTER_OLD, CLUSTER_NEW } Cluster; @@ -177,15 +177,15 @@ typedef long pgpid_t; typedef struct { ControlData controldata; /* pg_control information */ - DbInfoArr dbarr; /* dbinfos array */ - char *pgdata; /* pathname for cluster's $PGDATA directory */ - char *bindir; /* pathname for cluster's executable directory */ - unsigned short port; /* port number where postmaster is waiting */ - uint32 major_version; /* PG_VERSION of cluster */ - char *major_version_str; /* string PG_VERSION of cluster */ - Oid pg_database_oid; /* OID of pg_database relation */ - char *libpath; /* pathname for cluster's pkglibdir */ - char *tablespace_suffix; /* directory specification */ + DbInfoArr dbarr; /* dbinfos array */ + char *pgdata; /* pathname for cluster's $PGDATA directory */ + char *bindir; /* pathname for cluster's executable directory */ + unsigned short port; /* port number where postmaster is waiting */ + uint32 major_version; /* PG_VERSION of cluster */ + char *major_version_str; /* string PG_VERSION of cluster */ + Oid pg_database_oid; /* OID of pg_database relation */ + char *libpath; /* pathname for cluster's pkglibdir */ + char *tablespace_suffix; /* directory specification */ } ClusterInfo; @@ -197,11 +197,12 @@ typedef struct */ typedef struct { - ClusterInfo old, new; /* old and new cluster information */ + ClusterInfo old, + new; /* old and new cluster information */ const char *progname; /* complete pathname for this program */ char *exec_path; /* full path to my executable */ char *user; /* username for clusters */ - char cwd[MAXPGPATH]; /* current working directory, used for output */ + char cwd[MAXPGPATH]; /* current working directory, used for output */ char **tablespaces; /* tablespaces */ int num_tablespaces; char **libraries; /* loadable libraries */ @@ -216,37 +217,37 @@ typedef struct * changes */ bool verbose; /* TRUE -> be verbose in messages */ bool debug; /* TRUE -> log more information */ - transferMode transfer_mode; /* copy files or link them? */ + transferMode transfer_mode; /* copy files or link them? */ } migratorContext; /* * Global variables */ -extern char scandir_file_pattern[]; +extern char scandir_file_pattern[]; /* check.c */ void output_check_banner(migratorContext *ctx, bool *live_check); -void check_old_cluster(migratorContext *ctx, bool live_check, - char **sequence_script_file_name); +void check_old_cluster(migratorContext *ctx, bool live_check, + char **sequence_script_file_name); void check_new_cluster(migratorContext *ctx); void report_clusters_compatible(migratorContext *ctx); -void issue_warnings(migratorContext *ctx, - char *sequence_script_file_name); -void output_completion_banner(migratorContext *ctx, - char *deletion_script_file_name); +void issue_warnings(migratorContext *ctx, + char *sequence_script_file_name); +void output_completion_banner(migratorContext *ctx, + char *deletion_script_file_name); void check_cluster_versions(migratorContext *ctx); void check_cluster_compatibility(migratorContext *ctx, bool live_check); -void create_script_for_old_cluster_deletion(migratorContext *ctx, - char **deletion_script_file_name); +void create_script_for_old_cluster_deletion(migratorContext *ctx, + char **deletion_script_file_name); /* controldata.c */ void get_control_data(migratorContext *ctx, ClusterInfo *cluster, bool live_check); -void check_control_data(migratorContext *ctx, ControlData *oldctrl, +void check_control_data(migratorContext *ctx, ControlData *oldctrl, ControlData *newctrl); @@ -258,8 +259,8 @@ void split_old_dump(migratorContext *ctx); /* exec.c */ -int exec_prog(migratorContext *ctx, bool throw_error, - const char *cmd,...); +int exec_prog(migratorContext *ctx, bool throw_error, + const char *cmd,...); void verify_directories(migratorContext *ctx); bool is_server_running(migratorContext *ctx, const char *datadir); void rename_old_pg_control(migratorContext *ctx); @@ -279,31 +280,28 @@ typedef const char *(*pluginShutdown) (void *pluginData); typedef struct { - uint16 oldPageVersion; /* Page layout version of the old - * cluster */ - uint16 newPageVersion; /* Page layout version of the new - * cluster */ + uint16 oldPageVersion; /* Page layout version of the old cluster */ + uint16 newPageVersion; /* Page layout version of the new cluster */ uint16 pluginVersion; /* API version of converter plugin */ - void *pluginData; /* Plugin data (set by plugin) */ - pluginStartup startup; /* Pointer to plugin's startup function */ - pluginConvertFile convertFile; /* Pointer to plugin's file converter + void *pluginData; /* Plugin data (set by plugin) */ + pluginStartup startup; /* Pointer to plugin's startup function */ + pluginConvertFile convertFile; /* Pointer to plugin's file converter * function */ - pluginConvertPage convertPage; /* Pointer to plugin's page converter + pluginConvertPage convertPage; /* Pointer to plugin's page converter * function */ pluginShutdown shutdown; /* Pointer to plugin's shutdown function */ } pageCnvCtx; const char *setupPageConverter(migratorContext *ctx, pageCnvCtx **result); - #else /* dummy */ typedef void *pageCnvCtx; #endif -int dir_matching_filenames(const struct dirent *scan_ent); -int pg_scandir(migratorContext *ctx, const char *dirname, - struct dirent ***namelist, - int (*selector) (const struct dirent *)); +int dir_matching_filenames(const struct dirent * scan_ent); +int pg_scandir(migratorContext *ctx, const char *dirname, + struct dirent *** namelist, + int (*selector) (const struct dirent *)); const char *copyAndUpdateFile(migratorContext *ctx, pageCnvCtx *pageConverter, const char *src, const char *dst, bool force); @@ -315,21 +313,21 @@ void check_hard_link(migratorContext *ctx); /* function.c */ void install_support_functions(migratorContext *ctx); -void uninstall_support_functions(migratorContext *ctx); +void uninstall_support_functions(migratorContext *ctx); void get_loadable_libraries(migratorContext *ctx); void check_loadable_libraries(migratorContext *ctx); /* info.c */ FileNameMap *gen_db_file_maps(migratorContext *ctx, DbInfo *old_db, - DbInfo *new_db, int *nmaps, const char *old_pgdata, - const char *new_pgdata); -void get_db_and_rel_infos(migratorContext *ctx, DbInfoArr *db_arr, - Cluster whichCluster); + DbInfo *new_db, int *nmaps, const char *old_pgdata, + const char *new_pgdata); +void get_db_and_rel_infos(migratorContext *ctx, DbInfoArr *db_arr, + Cluster whichCluster); DbInfo *dbarr_lookup_db(DbInfoArr *db_arr, const char *db_name); void dbarr_free(DbInfoArr *db_arr); -void print_maps(migratorContext *ctx, FileNameMap *maps, int n, - const char *dbName); +void print_maps(migratorContext *ctx, FileNameMap *maps, int n, + const char *dbName); /* option.c */ @@ -349,15 +347,15 @@ void init_tablespaces(migratorContext *ctx); /* server.c */ -PGconn *connectToServer(migratorContext *ctx, const char *db_name, +PGconn *connectToServer(migratorContext *ctx, const char *db_name, Cluster whichCluster); -PGresult *executeQueryOrDie(migratorContext *ctx, PGconn *conn, +PGresult *executeQueryOrDie(migratorContext *ctx, PGconn *conn, const char *fmt,...); -void start_postmaster(migratorContext *ctx, Cluster whichCluster, bool quiet); +void start_postmaster(migratorContext *ctx, Cluster whichCluster, bool quiet); void stop_postmaster(migratorContext *ctx, bool fast, bool quiet); -uint32 get_major_server_version(migratorContext *ctx, char **verstr, - Cluster whichCluster); +uint32 get_major_server_version(migratorContext *ctx, char **verstr, + Cluster whichCluster); void check_for_libpq_envvars(migratorContext *ctx); @@ -381,22 +379,22 @@ const char *getErrorText(int errNum); /* version.c */ -void new_9_0_populate_pg_largeobject_metadata(migratorContext *ctx, - bool check_mode, Cluster whichCluster); +void new_9_0_populate_pg_largeobject_metadata(migratorContext *ctx, + bool check_mode, Cluster whichCluster); /* version_old_8_3.c */ -void old_8_3_check_for_name_data_type_usage(migratorContext *ctx, - Cluster whichCluster); -void old_8_3_check_for_tsquery_usage(migratorContext *ctx, - Cluster whichCluster); -void old_8_3_check_for_isn_and_int8_passing_mismatch(migratorContext *ctx, - Cluster whichCluster); -void old_8_3_rebuild_tsvector_tables(migratorContext *ctx, - bool check_mode, Cluster whichCluster); -void old_8_3_invalidate_hash_gin_indexes(migratorContext *ctx, - bool check_mode, Cluster whichCluster); -void old_8_3_invalidate_bpchar_pattern_ops_indexes(migratorContext *ctx, - bool check_mode, Cluster whichCluster); -char *old_8_3_create_sequence_script(migratorContext *ctx, - Cluster whichCluster); +void old_8_3_check_for_name_data_type_usage(migratorContext *ctx, + Cluster whichCluster); +void old_8_3_check_for_tsquery_usage(migratorContext *ctx, + Cluster whichCluster); +void old_8_3_check_for_isn_and_int8_passing_mismatch(migratorContext *ctx, + Cluster whichCluster); +void old_8_3_rebuild_tsvector_tables(migratorContext *ctx, + bool check_mode, Cluster whichCluster); +void old_8_3_invalidate_hash_gin_indexes(migratorContext *ctx, + bool check_mode, Cluster whichCluster); +void old_8_3_invalidate_bpchar_pattern_ops_indexes(migratorContext *ctx, + bool check_mode, Cluster whichCluster); +char *old_8_3_create_sequence_script(migratorContext *ctx, + Cluster whichCluster); diff --git a/contrib/pg_upgrade/relfilenode.c b/contrib/pg_upgrade/relfilenode.c index 1ae1c37632..1ef176a041 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_upgrade/relfilenode.c +++ b/contrib/pg_upgrade/relfilenode.c @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ * relfilenode functions * * Copyright (c) 2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_upgrade/relfilenode.c,v 1.7 2010/07/03 16:33:14 momjian Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_upgrade/relfilenode.c,v 1.8 2010/07/06 19:18:55 momjian Exp $ */ #include "pg_upgrade.h" @@ -21,8 +21,8 @@ static void transfer_relfile(migratorContext *ctx, pageCnvCtx *pageConverter, const char *newnspname, const char *newrelname); /* used by scandir(), must be global */ -char scandir_file_pattern[MAXPGPATH]; - +char scandir_file_pattern[MAXPGPATH]; + /* * transfer_all_new_dbs() * diff --git a/contrib/pg_upgrade/server.c b/contrib/pg_upgrade/server.c index 54a78e0567..a9243ab75a 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_upgrade/server.c +++ b/contrib/pg_upgrade/server.c @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ * database server functions * * Copyright (c) 2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_upgrade/server.c,v 1.7 2010/07/03 16:33:14 momjian Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_upgrade/server.c,v 1.8 2010/07/06 19:18:55 momjian Exp $ */ #include "pg_upgrade.h" @@ -181,11 +181,11 @@ start_postmaster(migratorContext *ctx, Cluster whichCluster, bool quiet) } /* - * On Win32, we can't send both server output and pg_ctl output - * to the same file because we get the error: - * "The process cannot access the file because it is being used by another process." - * so we have to send pg_ctl output to 'nul'. - */ + * On Win32, we can't send both server output and pg_ctl output to the + * same file because we get the error: "The process cannot access the file + * because it is being used by another process." so we have to send pg_ctl + * output to 'nul'. + */ snprintf(cmd, sizeof(cmd), SYSTEMQUOTE "\"%s/pg_ctl\" -l \"%s\" -D \"%s\" " "-o \"-p %d -c autovacuum=off " @@ -233,13 +233,13 @@ stop_postmaster(migratorContext *ctx, bool fast, bool quiet) /* See comment in start_postmaster() about why win32 output is ignored. */ snprintf(cmd, sizeof(cmd), - SYSTEMQUOTE "\"%s/pg_ctl\" -l \"%s\" -D \"%s\" %s stop >> " - "\"%s\" 2>&1" SYSTEMQUOTE, - bindir, ctx->logfile, datadir, fast ? "-m fast" : "", + SYSTEMQUOTE "\"%s/pg_ctl\" -l \"%s\" -D \"%s\" %s stop >> " + "\"%s\" 2>&1" SYSTEMQUOTE, + bindir, ctx->logfile, datadir, fast ? "-m fast" : "", #ifndef WIN32 - ctx->logfile); + ctx->logfile); #else - DEVNULL); + DEVNULL); #endif exec_prog(ctx, fast ? false : true, "%s", cmd); diff --git a/contrib/pg_upgrade/tablespace.c b/contrib/pg_upgrade/tablespace.c index bb8877185e..11caaa3e89 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_upgrade/tablespace.c +++ b/contrib/pg_upgrade/tablespace.c @@ -4,14 +4,14 @@ * tablespace functions * * Copyright (c) 2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_upgrade/tablespace.c,v 1.5 2010/07/03 16:33:14 momjian Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_upgrade/tablespace.c,v 1.6 2010/07/06 19:18:55 momjian Exp $ */ #include "pg_upgrade.h" static void get_tablespace_paths(migratorContext *ctx); static void set_tablespace_directory_suffix(migratorContext *ctx, - Cluster whichCluster); + Cluster whichCluster); void @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ get_tablespace_paths(migratorContext *ctx) if ((ctx->num_tablespaces = PQntuples(res)) != 0) ctx->tablespaces = (char **) pg_malloc(ctx, - ctx->num_tablespaces * sizeof(char *)); + ctx->num_tablespaces * sizeof(char *)); else ctx->tablespaces = NULL; diff --git a/contrib/pg_upgrade/util.c b/contrib/pg_upgrade/util.c index 49f374ef3b..24fc08ef70 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_upgrade/util.c +++ b/contrib/pg_upgrade/util.c @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ * utility functions * * Copyright (c) 2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_upgrade/util.c,v 1.4 2010/07/03 16:33:14 momjian Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_upgrade/util.c,v 1.5 2010/07/06 19:18:55 momjian Exp $ */ #include "pg_upgrade.h" @@ -156,8 +156,8 @@ quote_identifier(migratorContext *ctx, const char *s) int get_user_info(migratorContext *ctx, char **user_name) { - int user_id; - + int user_id; + #ifndef WIN32 struct passwd *pw = getpwuid(geteuid()); diff --git a/contrib/pg_upgrade_support/pg_upgrade_support.c b/contrib/pg_upgrade_support/pg_upgrade_support.c index 4e93b97258..08050ac6e8 100644 --- a/contrib/pg_upgrade_support/pg_upgrade_support.c +++ b/contrib/pg_upgrade_support/pg_upgrade_support.c @@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ * to control oid and relfilenode assignment * * Copyright (c) 2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_upgrade_support/pg_upgrade_support.c,v 1.4 2010/07/03 16:33:15 momjian Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pg_upgrade_support/pg_upgrade_support.c,v 1.5 2010/07/06 19:18:55 momjian Exp $ */ #include "postgres.h" @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ * not be compiling against PG 9.0. */ extern void EnumValuesCreate(Oid enumTypeOid, List *vals, - Oid binary_upgrade_next_pg_enum_oid); + Oid binary_upgrade_next_pg_enum_oid); #ifdef PG_MODULE_MAGIC PG_MODULE_MAGIC; @@ -34,13 +34,13 @@ extern PGDLLIMPORT Oid binary_upgrade_next_heap_relfilenode; extern PGDLLIMPORT Oid binary_upgrade_next_toast_relfilenode; extern PGDLLIMPORT Oid binary_upgrade_next_index_relfilenode; -Datum set_next_pg_type_oid(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum set_next_pg_type_array_oid(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum set_next_pg_type_toast_oid(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum set_next_heap_relfilenode(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum set_next_toast_relfilenode(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum set_next_index_relfilenode(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); -Datum add_pg_enum_label(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum set_next_pg_type_oid(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum set_next_pg_type_array_oid(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum set_next_pg_type_toast_oid(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum set_next_heap_relfilenode(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum set_next_toast_relfilenode(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum set_next_index_relfilenode(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); +Datum add_pg_enum_label(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(set_next_pg_type_oid); PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(set_next_pg_type_array_oid); @@ -115,11 +115,10 @@ add_pg_enum_label(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) { Oid enumoid = PG_GETARG_OID(0); Oid typoid = PG_GETARG_OID(1); - Name label = PG_GETARG_NAME(2); - + Name label = PG_GETARG_NAME(2); + EnumValuesCreate(typoid, list_make1(makeString(NameStr(*label))), enumoid); PG_RETURN_VOID(); } - diff --git a/contrib/pgbench/pgbench.c b/contrib/pgbench/pgbench.c index 47a1493c7a..2aaa8df846 100644 --- a/contrib/pgbench/pgbench.c +++ b/contrib/pgbench/pgbench.c @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ * A simple benchmark program for PostgreSQL * Originally written by Tatsuo Ishii and enhanced by many contributors. * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgbench/pgbench.c,v 1.98 2010/03/23 01:29:22 itagaki Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgbench/pgbench.c,v 1.99 2010/07/06 19:18:55 momjian Exp $ * Copyright (c) 2000-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * ALL RIGHTS RESERVED; * @@ -2161,7 +2161,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg) TState *thread = (TState *) arg; CState *state = thread->state; TResult *result; - FILE *logfile = NULL; /* per-thread log file */ + FILE *logfile = NULL; /* per-thread log file */ instr_time start, end; int nstate = thread->nstate; @@ -2273,7 +2273,7 @@ threadRun(void *arg) goto done; } - FD_SET (sock, &input_mask); + FD_SET(sock, &input_mask); if (maxsock < sock) maxsock = sock; @@ -2407,8 +2407,8 @@ pthread_create(pthread_t *thread, /* * Set a different random seed in each child process. Otherwise they all - * inherit the parent's state and generate the same "random" sequence. - * (In the threaded case, the different threads will obtain subsets of the + * inherit the parent's state and generate the same "random" sequence. (In + * the threaded case, the different threads will obtain subsets of the * output of a single random() sequence, which should be okay for our * purposes.) */ @@ -2484,7 +2484,7 @@ typedef struct win32_pthread void *(*routine) (void *); void *arg; void *result; -} win32_pthread; +} win32_pthread; static unsigned __stdcall win32_pthread_run(void *arg) diff --git a/contrib/pgcrypto/sha2.c b/contrib/pgcrypto/sha2.c index 668906fedb..d65995456c 100644 --- a/contrib/pgcrypto/sha2.c +++ b/contrib/pgcrypto/sha2.c @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ * * $From: sha2.c,v 1.1 2001/11/08 00:01:51 adg Exp adg $ * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/sha2.c,v 1.12 2010/04/02 15:21:20 mha Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/pgcrypto/sha2.c,v 1.13 2010/07/06 19:18:55 momjian Exp $ */ #include "postgres.h" @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ * * NOTE: The naming of R and S appears backwards here (R is a SHIFT and * S is a ROTATION) because the SHA-256/384/512 description document - * (see http://www.iwar.org.uk/comsec/resources/cipher/sha256-384-512.pdf) + * (see http://www.iwar.org.uk/comsec/resources/cipher/sha256-384-512.pdf) * uses this same "backwards" definition. */ /* Shift-right (used in SHA-256, SHA-384, and SHA-512): */ diff --git a/contrib/xml2/xpath.c b/contrib/xml2/xpath.c index 5fcfa7b1e1..dbf0b76f92 100644 --- a/contrib/xml2/xpath.c +++ b/contrib/xml2/xpath.c @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ /* - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/xml2/xpath.c,v 1.29 2010/03/03 19:10:22 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/xml2/xpath.c,v 1.30 2010/07/06 19:18:55 momjian Exp $ * * Parser interface for DOM-based parser (libxml) rather than * stream-based SAX-type parser @@ -631,8 +631,8 @@ xpath_table(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) } /* - * Setup the parser. This should happen after we are done evaluating - * the query, in case it calls functions that set up libxml differently. + * Setup the parser. This should happen after we are done evaluating the + * query, in case it calls functions that set up libxml differently. */ pgxml_parser_init(); diff --git a/contrib/xml2/xslt_proc.c b/contrib/xml2/xslt_proc.c index 8bd9e401fa..4c80732bb8 100644 --- a/contrib/xml2/xslt_proc.c +++ b/contrib/xml2/xslt_proc.c @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ /* - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/xml2/xslt_proc.c,v 1.20 2010/03/03 19:10:22 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/contrib/xml2/xslt_proc.c,v 1.21 2010/07/06 19:18:55 momjian Exp $ * * XSLT processing functions (requiring libxslt) * @@ -28,8 +28,7 @@ #include <libxslt/xsltInternals.h> #include <libxslt/transform.h> #include <libxslt/xsltutils.h> - -#endif /* USE_LIBXSLT */ +#endif /* USE_LIBXSLT */ /* externally accessible functions */ @@ -45,8 +44,7 @@ extern void pgxml_parser_init(void); static void parse_params(const char **params, text *paramstr); #define MAXPARAMS 20 /* must be even, see parse_params() */ - -#endif /* USE_LIBXSLT */ +#endif /* USE_LIBXSLT */ PG_FUNCTION_INFO_V1(xslt_process); @@ -130,15 +128,13 @@ xslt_process(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) PG_RETURN_NULL(); PG_RETURN_TEXT_P(cstring_to_text_with_len((char *) resstr, reslen)); - -#else /* !USE_LIBXSLT */ +#else /* !USE_LIBXSLT */ ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), errmsg("xslt_process() is not available without libxslt"))); PG_RETURN_NULL(); - -#endif /* USE_LIBXSLT */ +#endif /* USE_LIBXSLT */ } #ifdef USE_LIBXSLT @@ -191,4 +187,4 @@ parse_params(const char **params, text *paramstr) params[i] = NULL; } -#endif /* USE_LIBXSLT */ +#endif /* USE_LIBXSLT */ diff --git a/src/backend/access/heap/heapam.c b/src/backend/access/heap/heapam.c index 4b51ba948c..e17b6362c3 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/heap/heapam.c +++ b/src/backend/access/heap/heapam.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/heapam.c,v 1.291 2010/05/02 22:37:43 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/heapam.c,v 1.292 2010/07/06 19:18:55 momjian Exp $ * * * INTERFACE ROUTINES @@ -4126,10 +4126,10 @@ heap_xlog_clean(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record) /* * We're about to remove tuples. In Hot Standby mode, ensure that there's * no queries running for which the removed tuples are still visible. - * - * Not all HEAP2_CLEAN records remove tuples with xids, so we only want - * to conflict on the records that cause MVCC failures for user queries. - * If latestRemovedXid is invalid, skip conflict processing. + * + * Not all HEAP2_CLEAN records remove tuples with xids, so we only want to + * conflict on the records that cause MVCC failures for user queries. If + * latestRemovedXid is invalid, skip conflict processing. */ if (InHotStandby && TransactionIdIsValid(xlrec->latestRemovedXid)) ResolveRecoveryConflictWithSnapshot(xlrec->latestRemovedXid, diff --git a/src/backend/access/heap/pruneheap.c b/src/backend/access/heap/pruneheap.c index 713ee40899..3332e085b8 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/heap/pruneheap.c +++ b/src/backend/access/heap/pruneheap.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/pruneheap.c,v 1.24 2010/04/22 02:15:45 sriggs Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/heap/pruneheap.c,v 1.25 2010/07/06 19:18:55 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -122,7 +122,8 @@ heap_page_prune_opt(Relation relation, Buffer buffer, TransactionId OldestXmin) */ if (PageIsFull(page) || PageGetHeapFreeSpace(page) < minfree) { - TransactionId ignore = InvalidTransactionId; /* return value not needed */ + TransactionId ignore = InvalidTransactionId; /* return value not + * needed */ /* OK to prune */ (void) heap_page_prune(relation, buffer, OldestXmin, true, &ignore); diff --git a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtpage.c b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtpage.c index cb94c76bcc..5e9e7b9270 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtpage.c +++ b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtpage.c @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtpage.c,v 1.122 2010/03/28 09:27:01 sriggs Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtpage.c,v 1.123 2010/07/06 19:18:55 momjian Exp $ * * NOTES * Postgres btree pages look like ordinary relation pages. The opaque @@ -720,7 +720,7 @@ _bt_page_recyclable(Page page) */ void _bt_delitems_vacuum(Relation rel, Buffer buf, - OffsetNumber *itemnos, int nitems, BlockNumber lastBlockVacuumed) + OffsetNumber *itemnos, int nitems, BlockNumber lastBlockVacuumed) { Page page = BufferGetPage(buf); BTPageOpaque opaque; @@ -797,7 +797,7 @@ _bt_delitems_vacuum(Relation rel, Buffer buf, void _bt_delitems_delete(Relation rel, Buffer buf, - OffsetNumber *itemnos, int nitems, Relation heapRel) + OffsetNumber *itemnos, int nitems, Relation heapRel) { Page page = BufferGetPage(buf); BTPageOpaque opaque; @@ -847,8 +847,8 @@ _bt_delitems_delete(Relation rel, Buffer buf, rdata[0].next = &(rdata[1]); /* - * We need the target-offsets array whether or not we store the - * to allow us to find the latestRemovedXid on a standby server. + * We need the target-offsets array whether or not we store the to + * allow us to find the latestRemovedXid on a standby server. */ rdata[1].data = (char *) itemnos; rdata[1].len = nitems * sizeof(OffsetNumber); diff --git a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtxlog.c b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtxlog.c index 97b920feea..3261483475 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtxlog.c +++ b/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtxlog.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtxlog.c,v 1.68 2010/04/30 06:34:29 heikki Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/nbtree/nbtxlog.c,v 1.69 2010/07/06 19:18:55 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -568,23 +568,26 @@ static TransactionId btree_xlog_delete_get_latestRemovedXid(XLogRecord *record) { xl_btree_delete *xlrec = (xl_btree_delete *) XLogRecGetData(record); - OffsetNumber *unused; - Buffer ibuffer, hbuffer; - Page ipage, hpage; - ItemId iitemid, hitemid; - IndexTuple itup; + OffsetNumber *unused; + Buffer ibuffer, + hbuffer; + Page ipage, + hpage; + ItemId iitemid, + hitemid; + IndexTuple itup; HeapTupleHeader htuphdr; - BlockNumber hblkno; - OffsetNumber hoffnum; - TransactionId latestRemovedXid = InvalidTransactionId; - TransactionId htupxid = InvalidTransactionId; - int i; + BlockNumber hblkno; + OffsetNumber hoffnum; + TransactionId latestRemovedXid = InvalidTransactionId; + TransactionId htupxid = InvalidTransactionId; + int i; /* - * If there's nothing running on the standby we don't need to derive - * a full latestRemovedXid value, so use a fast path out of here. - * That returns InvalidTransactionId, and so will conflict with - * users, but since we just worked out that's zero people, its OK. + * If there's nothing running on the standby we don't need to derive a + * full latestRemovedXid value, so use a fast path out of here. That + * returns InvalidTransactionId, and so will conflict with users, but + * since we just worked out that's zero people, its OK. */ if (CountDBBackends(InvalidOid) == 0) return latestRemovedXid; @@ -598,8 +601,8 @@ btree_xlog_delete_get_latestRemovedXid(XLogRecord *record) ipage = (Page) BufferGetPage(ibuffer); /* - * Loop through the deleted index items to obtain the TransactionId - * from the heap items they point to. + * Loop through the deleted index items to obtain the TransactionId from + * the heap items they point to. */ unused = (OffsetNumber *) ((char *) xlrec + SizeOfBtreeDelete); @@ -624,8 +627,8 @@ btree_xlog_delete_get_latestRemovedXid(XLogRecord *record) hpage = (Page) BufferGetPage(hbuffer); /* - * Look up the heap tuple header that the index tuple points at - * by using the heap node supplied with the xlrec. We can't use + * Look up the heap tuple header that the index tuple points at by + * using the heap node supplied with the xlrec. We can't use * heap_fetch, since it uses ReadBuffer rather than XLogReadBuffer. * Note that we are not looking at tuple data here, just headers. */ @@ -651,8 +654,8 @@ btree_xlog_delete_get_latestRemovedXid(XLogRecord *record) htuphdr = (HeapTupleHeader) PageGetItem(hpage, hitemid); /* - * Get the heap tuple's xmin/xmax and ratchet up the latestRemovedXid. - * No need to consider xvac values here. + * Get the heap tuple's xmin/xmax and ratchet up the + * latestRemovedXid. No need to consider xvac values here. */ htupxid = HeapTupleHeaderGetXmin(htuphdr); if (TransactionIdFollows(htupxid, latestRemovedXid)) @@ -667,7 +670,8 @@ btree_xlog_delete_get_latestRemovedXid(XLogRecord *record) /* * Conjecture: if hitemid is dead then it had xids before the xids * marked on LP_NORMAL items. So we just ignore this item and move - * onto the next, for the purposes of calculating latestRemovedxids. + * onto the next, for the purposes of calculating + * latestRemovedxids. */ } else @@ -679,13 +683,12 @@ btree_xlog_delete_get_latestRemovedXid(XLogRecord *record) UnlockReleaseBuffer(ibuffer); /* - * Note that if all heap tuples were LP_DEAD then we will be - * returning InvalidTransactionId here. That can happen if we are - * re-replaying this record type, though that will be before the - * consistency point and will not cause problems. It should - * happen very rarely after the consistency point, though note - * that we can't tell the difference between this and the fast - * path exit above. May need to change that in future. + * Note that if all heap tuples were LP_DEAD then we will be returning + * InvalidTransactionId here. That can happen if we are re-replaying this + * record type, though that will be before the consistency point and will + * not cause problems. It should happen very rarely after the consistency + * point, though note that we can't tell the difference between this and + * the fast path exit above. May need to change that in future. */ return latestRemovedXid; } @@ -954,6 +957,7 @@ btree_redo(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record) switch (info) { case XLOG_BTREE_DELETE: + /* * Btree delete records can conflict with standby queries. You * might think that vacuum records would conflict as well, but @@ -972,6 +976,7 @@ btree_redo(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record) break; case XLOG_BTREE_REUSE_PAGE: + /* * Btree reuse page records exist to provide a conflict point * when we reuse pages in the index via the FSM. That's all it @@ -1143,7 +1148,7 @@ btree_desc(StringInfo buf, uint8 xl_info, char *rec) xl_btree_delete *xlrec = (xl_btree_delete *) rec; appendStringInfo(buf, "delete: index %u/%u/%u; iblk %u, heap %u/%u/%u;", - xlrec->node.spcNode, xlrec->node.dbNode, xlrec->node.relNode, + xlrec->node.spcNode, xlrec->node.dbNode, xlrec->node.relNode, xlrec->block, xlrec->hnode.spcNode, xlrec->hnode.dbNode, xlrec->hnode.relNode); break; @@ -1176,7 +1181,7 @@ btree_desc(StringInfo buf, uint8 xl_info, char *rec) appendStringInfo(buf, "reuse_page: rel %u/%u/%u; latestRemovedXid %u", xlrec->node.spcNode, xlrec->node.dbNode, - xlrec->node.relNode, xlrec->latestRemovedXid); + xlrec->node.relNode, xlrec->latestRemovedXid); break; } default: diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/twophase.c b/src/backend/access/transam/twophase.c index 02703226be..d6dca97bce 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/transam/twophase.c +++ b/src/backend/access/transam/twophase.c @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/twophase.c,v 1.61 2010/04/28 00:09:05 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/twophase.c,v 1.62 2010/07/06 19:18:55 momjian Exp $ * * NOTES * Each global transaction is associated with a global transaction @@ -1201,7 +1201,7 @@ StandbyTransactionIdIsPrepared(TransactionId xid) Assert(TransactionIdIsValid(xid)); if (max_prepared_xacts <= 0) - return false; /* nothing to do */ + return false; /* nothing to do */ /* Read and validate file */ buf = ReadTwoPhaseFile(xid, false); diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/xact.c b/src/backend/access/transam/xact.c index d97b75ab96..d125738b4c 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/transam/xact.c +++ b/src/backend/access/transam/xact.c @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/xact.c,v 1.292 2010/06/29 18:44:58 momjian Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/xact.c,v 1.293 2010/07/06 19:18:55 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -1057,9 +1057,9 @@ RecordTransactionCommit(void) * Asynchronous commit case: * * This enables possible committed transaction loss in the case of a - * postmaster crash because WAL buffers are left unwritten. - * Ideally we could issue the WAL write without the fsync, but - * some wal_sync_methods do not allow separate write/fsync. + * postmaster crash because WAL buffers are left unwritten. Ideally we + * could issue the WAL write without the fsync, but some + * wal_sync_methods do not allow separate write/fsync. * * Report the latest async commit LSN, so that the WAL writer knows to * flush this commit. @@ -1354,12 +1354,12 @@ RecordTransactionAbort(bool isSubXact) /* * Report the latest async abort LSN, so that the WAL writer knows to - * flush this abort. There's nothing to be gained by delaying this, - * since WALWriter may as well do this when it can. This is important - * with streaming replication because if we don't flush WAL regularly - * we will find that large aborts leave us with a long backlog for - * when commits occur after the abort, increasing our window of data - * loss should problems occur at that point. + * flush this abort. There's nothing to be gained by delaying this, since + * WALWriter may as well do this when it can. This is important with + * streaming replication because if we don't flush WAL regularly we will + * find that large aborts leave us with a long backlog for when commits + * occur after the abort, increasing our window of data loss should + * problems occur at that point. */ if (!isSubXact) XLogSetAsyncCommitLSN(XactLastRecEnd); diff --git a/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c b/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c index c5a833f0b9..7fbccc5350 100644 --- a/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c +++ b/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c,v 1.429 2010/07/03 22:15:45 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/access/transam/xlog.c,v 1.430 2010/07/06 19:18:55 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -363,7 +363,7 @@ typedef struct XLogCtlData uint32 ckptXidEpoch; /* nextXID & epoch of latest checkpoint */ TransactionId ckptXid; XLogRecPtr asyncCommitLSN; /* LSN of newest async commit */ - uint32 lastRemovedLog; /* latest removed/recycled XLOG segment */ + uint32 lastRemovedLog; /* latest removed/recycled XLOG segment */ uint32 lastRemovedSeg; /* Protected by WALWriteLock: */ @@ -379,6 +379,7 @@ typedef struct XLogCtlData int XLogCacheBlck; /* highest allocated xlog buffer index */ TimeLineID ThisTimeLineID; TimeLineID RecoveryTargetTLI; + /* * archiveCleanupCommand is read from recovery.conf but needs to be in * shared memory so that the bgwriter process can access it. @@ -480,13 +481,13 @@ static uint32 readId = 0; static uint32 readSeg = 0; static uint32 readOff = 0; static uint32 readLen = 0; -static int readSource = 0; /* XLOG_FROM_* code */ +static int readSource = 0; /* XLOG_FROM_* code */ /* * Keeps track of which sources we've tried to read the current WAL * record from and failed. */ -static int failedSources = 0; /* OR of XLOG_FROM_* codes */ +static int failedSources = 0; /* OR of XLOG_FROM_* codes */ /* * These variables track when we last obtained some WAL data to process, @@ -495,7 +496,7 @@ static int failedSources = 0; /* OR of XLOG_FROM_* codes */ * to process right now.) */ static TimestampTz XLogReceiptTime = 0; -static int XLogReceiptSource = 0; /* XLOG_FROM_* code */ +static int XLogReceiptSource = 0; /* XLOG_FROM_* code */ /* Buffer for currently read page (XLOG_BLCKSZ bytes) */ static char *readBuf = NULL; @@ -574,7 +575,7 @@ static int XLogFileReadAnyTLI(uint32 log, uint32 seg, int emode, int sources); static bool XLogPageRead(XLogRecPtr *RecPtr, int emode, bool fetching_ckpt, bool randAccess); -static int emode_for_corrupt_record(int emode, XLogRecPtr RecPtr); +static int emode_for_corrupt_record(int emode, XLogRecPtr RecPtr); static void XLogFileClose(void); static bool RestoreArchivedFile(char *path, const char *xlogfname, const char *recovername, off_t expectedSize); @@ -2139,13 +2140,14 @@ XLogBackgroundFlush(void) } /* - * If already known flushed, we're done. Just need to check if we - * are holding an open file handle to a logfile that's no longer - * in use, preventing the file from being deleted. + * If already known flushed, we're done. Just need to check if we are + * holding an open file handle to a logfile that's no longer in use, + * preventing the file from being deleted. */ if (XLByteLE(WriteRqstPtr, LogwrtResult.Flush)) { - if (openLogFile >= 0) { + if (openLogFile >= 0) + { if (!XLByteInPrevSeg(LogwrtResult.Write, openLogId, openLogSeg)) { XLogFileClose(); @@ -4348,8 +4350,8 @@ writeTimeLineHistory(TimeLineID newTLI, TimeLineID parentTLI, XLogFileName(xlogfname, endTLI, endLogId, endLogSeg); /* - * Write comment to history file to explain why and where timeline changed. - * Comment varies according to the recovery target used. + * Write comment to history file to explain why and where timeline + * changed. Comment varies according to the recovery target used. */ if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID) snprintf(buffer, sizeof(buffer), @@ -5029,8 +5031,8 @@ parseRecoveryCommandFileLine(char *cmdline, char **key_p, char **value_p) *key_p = *value_p = NULL; /* - * Allocate the buffer on first use. It's used to hold both the - * parameter name and value. + * Allocate the buffer on first use. It's used to hold both the parameter + * name and value. */ if (buf == NULL) buf = malloc(MAXPGPATH + 1); @@ -5076,7 +5078,7 @@ parseRecoveryCommandFileLine(char *cmdline, char **key_p, char **value_p) } } else if (*ptr == '\0') - return false; /* unterminated quoted string */ + return false; /* unterminated quoted string */ else *(bufp++) = *ptr; @@ -5604,8 +5606,8 @@ void GetXLogReceiptTime(TimestampTz *rtime, bool *fromStream) { /* - * This must be executed in the startup process, since we don't export - * the relevant state to shared memory. + * This must be executed in the startup process, since we don't export the + * relevant state to shared memory. */ Assert(InRecovery); @@ -5637,8 +5639,8 @@ static void CheckRequiredParameterValues(void) { /* - * For archive recovery, the WAL must be generated with at least - * 'archive' wal_level. + * For archive recovery, the WAL must be generated with at least 'archive' + * wal_level. */ if (InArchiveRecovery && ControlFile->wal_level == WAL_LEVEL_MINIMAL) { @@ -5648,8 +5650,8 @@ CheckRequiredParameterValues(void) } /* - * For Hot Standby, the WAL must be generated with 'hot_standby' mode, - * and we must have at least as many backend slots as the primary. + * For Hot Standby, the WAL must be generated with 'hot_standby' mode, and + * we must have at least as many backend slots as the primary. */ if (InArchiveRecovery && EnableHotStandby) { @@ -5785,8 +5787,9 @@ StartupXLOG(void) ControlFile->checkPointCopy.ThisTimeLineID))); /* - * Save the selected recovery target timeline ID and archive_cleanup_command - * in shared memory so that other processes can see them + * Save the selected recovery target timeline ID and + * archive_cleanup_command in shared memory so that other processes can + * see them */ XLogCtl->RecoveryTargetTLI = recoveryTargetTLI; strncpy(XLogCtl->archiveCleanupCommand, @@ -5800,8 +5803,8 @@ StartupXLOG(void) (errmsg("entering standby mode"))); else if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_XID) ereport(LOG, - (errmsg("starting point-in-time recovery to XID %u", - recoveryTargetXid))); + (errmsg("starting point-in-time recovery to XID %u", + recoveryTargetXid))); else if (recoveryTarget == RECOVERY_TARGET_TIME) ereport(LOG, (errmsg("starting point-in-time recovery to %s", @@ -5940,6 +5943,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void) if (InRecovery) { int rmid; + /* use volatile pointer to prevent code rearrangement */ volatile XLogCtlData *xlogctl = XLogCtl; @@ -6008,8 +6012,8 @@ StartupXLOG(void) CheckRequiredParameterValues(); /* - * Initialize for Hot Standby, if enabled. We won't let backends - * in yet, not until we've reached the min recovery point specified in + * Initialize for Hot Standby, if enabled. We won't let backends in + * yet, not until we've reached the min recovery point specified in * control file and we've established a recovery snapshot from a * running-xacts WAL record. */ @@ -6038,9 +6042,9 @@ StartupXLOG(void) /* * If we're beginning at a shutdown checkpoint, we know that - * nothing was running on the master at this point. So fake-up - * an empty running-xacts record and use that here and now. - * Recover additional standby state for prepared transactions. + * nothing was running on the master at this point. So fake-up an + * empty running-xacts record and use that here and now. Recover + * additional standby state for prepared transactions. */ if (wasShutdown) { @@ -6048,10 +6052,10 @@ StartupXLOG(void) TransactionId latestCompletedXid; /* - * Construct a RunningTransactions snapshot representing a shut - * down server, with only prepared transactions still alive. - * We're never overflowed at this point because all subxids - * are listed with their parent prepared transactions. + * Construct a RunningTransactions snapshot representing a + * shut down server, with only prepared transactions still + * alive. We're never overflowed at this point because all + * subxids are listed with their parent prepared transactions. */ running.xcnt = nxids; running.subxid_overflow = false; @@ -6081,12 +6085,12 @@ StartupXLOG(void) * recoveryLastXTime. * * This is slightly confusing if we're starting from an online - * checkpoint; we've just read and replayed the chekpoint record, - * but we're going to start replay from its redo pointer, which - * precedes the location of the checkpoint record itself. So even - * though the last record we've replayed is indeed ReadRecPtr, we - * haven't replayed all the preceding records yet. That's OK for - * the current use of these variables. + * checkpoint; we've just read and replayed the chekpoint record, but + * we're going to start replay from its redo pointer, which precedes + * the location of the checkpoint record itself. So even though the + * last record we've replayed is indeed ReadRecPtr, we haven't + * replayed all the preceding records yet. That's OK for the current + * use of these variables. */ SpinLockAcquire(&xlogctl->info_lck); xlogctl->replayEndRecPtr = ReadRecPtr; @@ -6098,12 +6102,11 @@ StartupXLOG(void) XLogReceiptTime = GetCurrentTimestamp(); /* - * Let postmaster know we've started redo now, so that it can - * launch bgwriter to perform restartpoints. We don't bother - * during crash recovery as restartpoints can only be performed - * during archive recovery. And we'd like to keep crash recovery - * simple, to avoid introducing bugs that could affect you when - * recovering after crash. + * Let postmaster know we've started redo now, so that it can launch + * bgwriter to perform restartpoints. We don't bother during crash + * recovery as restartpoints can only be performed during archive + * recovery. And we'd like to keep crash recovery simple, to avoid + * introducing bugs that could affect you when recovering after crash. * * After this point, we can no longer assume that we're the only * process in addition to postmaster! Also, fsync requests are @@ -6117,7 +6120,8 @@ StartupXLOG(void) } /* - * Allow read-only connections immediately if we're consistent already. + * Allow read-only connections immediately if we're consistent + * already. */ CheckRecoveryConsistency(); @@ -6214,7 +6218,10 @@ StartupXLOG(void) xlogctl->replayEndRecPtr = EndRecPtr; SpinLockRelease(&xlogctl->info_lck); - /* If we are attempting to enter Hot Standby mode, process XIDs we see */ + /* + * If we are attempting to enter Hot Standby mode, process + * XIDs we see + */ if (standbyState >= STANDBY_INITIALIZED && TransactionIdIsValid(record->xl_xid)) RecordKnownAssignedTransactionIds(record->xl_xid); @@ -6544,7 +6551,7 @@ StartupXLOG(void) static void CheckRecoveryConsistency(void) { - static bool backendsAllowed = false; + static bool backendsAllowed = false; /* * Have we passed our safe starting point? @@ -6560,9 +6567,9 @@ CheckRecoveryConsistency(void) } /* - * Have we got a valid starting snapshot that will allow - * queries to be run? If so, we can tell postmaster that the - * database is consistent now, enabling connections. + * Have we got a valid starting snapshot that will allow queries to be + * run? If so, we can tell postmaster that the database is consistent now, + * enabling connections. */ if (standbyState == STANDBY_SNAPSHOT_READY && !backendsAllowed && @@ -7400,8 +7407,8 @@ CreateCheckPoint(int flags) { /* * Calculate the last segment that we need to retain because of - * wal_keep_segments, by subtracting wal_keep_segments from the - * new checkpoint location. + * wal_keep_segments, by subtracting wal_keep_segments from the new + * checkpoint location. */ if (wal_keep_segments > 0) { @@ -7555,7 +7562,7 @@ CreateRestartPoint(int flags) CheckPoint lastCheckPoint; uint32 _logId; uint32 _logSeg; - TimestampTz xtime; + TimestampTz xtime; /* use volatile pointer to prevent code rearrangement */ volatile XLogCtlData *xlogctl = XLogCtl; @@ -7589,10 +7596,10 @@ CreateRestartPoint(int flags) * restartpoint, we can't perform a new restart point. We still update * minRecoveryPoint in that case, so that if this is a shutdown restart * point, we won't start up earlier than before. That's not strictly - * necessary, but when hot standby is enabled, it would be rather - * weird if the database opened up for read-only connections at a - * point-in-time before the last shutdown. Such time travel is still - * possible in case of immediate shutdown, though. + * necessary, but when hot standby is enabled, it would be rather weird if + * the database opened up for read-only connections at a point-in-time + * before the last shutdown. Such time travel is still possible in case of + * immediate shutdown, though. * * We don't explicitly advance minRecoveryPoint when we do create a * restartpoint. It's assumed that flushing the buffers will do that as a @@ -7621,9 +7628,9 @@ CreateRestartPoint(int flags) } /* - * Update the shared RedoRecPtr so that the startup process can - * calculate the number of segments replayed since last restartpoint, - * and request a restartpoint if it exceeds checkpoint_segments. + * Update the shared RedoRecPtr so that the startup process can calculate + * the number of segments replayed since last restartpoint, and request a + * restartpoint if it exceeds checkpoint_segments. * * You need to hold WALInsertLock and info_lck to update it, although * during recovery acquiring WALInsertLock is just pro forma, because @@ -7712,8 +7719,8 @@ CreateRestartPoint(int flags) ereport((log_checkpoints ? LOG : DEBUG2), (errmsg("recovery restart point at %X/%X", lastCheckPoint.redo.xlogid, lastCheckPoint.redo.xrecoff), - xtime ? errdetail("last completed transaction was at log time %s", - timestamptz_to_str(xtime)) : 0)); + xtime ? errdetail("last completed transaction was at log time %s", + timestamptz_to_str(xtime)) : 0)); LWLockRelease(CheckpointLock); @@ -7802,12 +7809,11 @@ XLogReportParameters(void) max_locks_per_xact != ControlFile->max_locks_per_xact) { /* - * The change in number of backend slots doesn't need to be - * WAL-logged if archiving is not enabled, as you can't start - * archive recovery with wal_level=minimal anyway. We don't - * really care about the values in pg_control either if - * wal_level=minimal, but seems better to keep them up-to-date - * to avoid confusion. + * The change in number of backend slots doesn't need to be WAL-logged + * if archiving is not enabled, as you can't start archive recovery + * with wal_level=minimal anyway. We don't really care about the + * values in pg_control either if wal_level=minimal, but seems better + * to keep them up-to-date to avoid confusion. */ if (wal_level != ControlFile->wal_level || XLogIsNeeded()) { @@ -7874,9 +7880,9 @@ xlog_redo(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record) SetTransactionIdLimit(checkPoint.oldestXid, checkPoint.oldestXidDB); /* - * If we see a shutdown checkpoint while waiting for an - * end-of-backup record, the backup was cancelled and the - * end-of-backup record will never arrive. + * If we see a shutdown checkpoint while waiting for an end-of-backup + * record, the backup was cancelled and the end-of-backup record will + * never arrive. */ if (InArchiveRecovery && !XLogRecPtrIsInvalid(ControlFile->backupStartPoint)) @@ -7884,10 +7890,10 @@ xlog_redo(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record) (errmsg("online backup was cancelled, recovery cannot continue"))); /* - * If we see a shutdown checkpoint, we know that nothing was - * running on the master at this point. So fake-up an empty - * running-xacts record and use that here and now. Recover - * additional standby state for prepared transactions. + * If we see a shutdown checkpoint, we know that nothing was running + * on the master at this point. So fake-up an empty running-xacts + * record and use that here and now. Recover additional standby state + * for prepared transactions. */ if (standbyState >= STANDBY_INITIALIZED) { @@ -7901,9 +7907,9 @@ xlog_redo(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record) /* * Construct a RunningTransactions snapshot representing a shut - * down server, with only prepared transactions still alive. - * We're never overflowed at this point because all subxids - * are listed with their parent prepared transactions. + * down server, with only prepared transactions still alive. We're + * never overflowed at this point because all subxids are listed + * with their parent prepared transactions. */ running.xcnt = nxids; running.subxid_overflow = false; @@ -8021,13 +8027,14 @@ xlog_redo(XLogRecPtr lsn, XLogRecord *record) ControlFile->max_prepared_xacts = xlrec.max_prepared_xacts; ControlFile->max_locks_per_xact = xlrec.max_locks_per_xact; ControlFile->wal_level = xlrec.wal_level; + /* - * Update minRecoveryPoint to ensure that if recovery is aborted, - * we recover back up to this point before allowing hot standby - * again. This is particularly important if wal_level was set to - * 'archive' before, and is now 'hot_standby', to ensure you don't - * run queries against the WAL preceding the wal_level change. - * Same applies to decreasing max_* settings. + * Update minRecoveryPoint to ensure that if recovery is aborted, we + * recover back up to this point before allowing hot standby again. + * This is particularly important if wal_level was set to 'archive' + * before, and is now 'hot_standby', to ensure you don't run queries + * against the WAL preceding the wal_level change. Same applies to + * decreasing max_* settings. */ minRecoveryPoint = ControlFile->minRecoveryPoint; if ((minRecoveryPoint.xlogid != 0 || minRecoveryPoint.xrecoff != 0) @@ -8321,7 +8328,7 @@ pg_start_backup(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) if (!XLogIsNeeded()) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_OBJECT_NOT_IN_PREREQUISITE_STATE), - errmsg("WAL level not sufficient for making an online backup"), + errmsg("WAL level not sufficient for making an online backup"), errhint("wal_level must be set to \"archive\" or \"hot_standby\" at server start."))); backupidstr = text_to_cstring(backupid); @@ -8513,7 +8520,7 @@ pg_stop_backup(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) if (!XLogIsNeeded()) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_OBJECT_NOT_IN_PREREQUISITE_STATE), - errmsg("WAL level not sufficient for making an online backup"), + errmsg("WAL level not sufficient for making an online backup"), errhint("wal_level must be set to \"archive\" or \"hot_standby\" at server start."))); /* @@ -8623,17 +8630,17 @@ pg_stop_backup(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) /* * If archiving is enabled, wait for all the required WAL files to be - * archived before returning. If archiving isn't enabled, the required - * WAL needs to be transported via streaming replication (hopefully - * with wal_keep_segments set high enough), or some more exotic - * mechanism like polling and copying files from pg_xlog with script. - * We have no knowledge of those mechanisms, so it's up to the user to - * ensure that he gets all the required WAL. + * archived before returning. If archiving isn't enabled, the required WAL + * needs to be transported via streaming replication (hopefully with + * wal_keep_segments set high enough), or some more exotic mechanism like + * polling and copying files from pg_xlog with script. We have no + * knowledge of those mechanisms, so it's up to the user to ensure that he + * gets all the required WAL. * * We wait until both the last WAL file filled during backup and the - * history file have been archived, and assume that the alphabetic - * sorting property of the WAL files ensures any earlier WAL files are - * safely archived as well. + * history file have been archived, and assume that the alphabetic sorting + * property of the WAL files ensures any earlier WAL files are safely + * archived as well. * * We wait forever, since archive_command is supposed to work and we * assume the admin wanted his backup to work completely. If you don't @@ -8642,44 +8649,44 @@ pg_stop_backup(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) */ if (XLogArchivingActive()) { - XLByteToPrevSeg(stoppoint, _logId, _logSeg); - XLogFileName(lastxlogfilename, ThisTimeLineID, _logId, _logSeg); - - XLByteToSeg(startpoint, _logId, _logSeg); - BackupHistoryFileName(histfilename, ThisTimeLineID, _logId, _logSeg, - startpoint.xrecoff % XLogSegSize); + XLByteToPrevSeg(stoppoint, _logId, _logSeg); + XLogFileName(lastxlogfilename, ThisTimeLineID, _logId, _logSeg); - seconds_before_warning = 60; - waits = 0; + XLByteToSeg(startpoint, _logId, _logSeg); + BackupHistoryFileName(histfilename, ThisTimeLineID, _logId, _logSeg, + startpoint.xrecoff % XLogSegSize); - while (XLogArchiveIsBusy(lastxlogfilename) || - XLogArchiveIsBusy(histfilename)) - { - CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS(); + seconds_before_warning = 60; + waits = 0; - if (!reported_waiting && waits > 5) + while (XLogArchiveIsBusy(lastxlogfilename) || + XLogArchiveIsBusy(histfilename)) { - ereport(NOTICE, - (errmsg("pg_stop_backup cleanup done, waiting for required WAL segments to be archived"))); - reported_waiting = true; - } + CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS(); - pg_usleep(1000000L); + if (!reported_waiting && waits > 5) + { + ereport(NOTICE, + (errmsg("pg_stop_backup cleanup done, waiting for required WAL segments to be archived"))); + reported_waiting = true; + } - if (++waits >= seconds_before_warning) - { - seconds_before_warning *= 2; /* This wraps in >10 years... */ - ereport(WARNING, - (errmsg("pg_stop_backup still waiting for all required WAL segments to be archived (%d seconds elapsed)", - waits), - errhint("Check that your archive_command is executing properly. " - "pg_stop_backup can be cancelled safely, " - "but the database backup will not be usable without all the WAL segments."))); + pg_usleep(1000000L); + + if (++waits >= seconds_before_warning) + { + seconds_before_warning *= 2; /* This wraps in >10 years... */ + ereport(WARNING, + (errmsg("pg_stop_backup still waiting for all required WAL segments to be archived (%d seconds elapsed)", + waits), + errhint("Check that your archive_command is executing properly. " + "pg_stop_backup can be cancelled safely, " + "but the database backup will not be usable without all the WAL segments."))); + } } - } - ereport(NOTICE, - (errmsg("pg_stop_backup complete, all required WAL segments have been archived"))); + ereport(NOTICE, + (errmsg("pg_stop_backup complete, all required WAL segments have been archived"))); } else ereport(NOTICE, @@ -8939,7 +8946,7 @@ pg_xlogfile_name(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_OBJECT_NOT_IN_PREREQUISITE_STATE), errmsg("recovery is in progress"), - errhint("pg_xlogfile_name() cannot be executed during recovery."))); + errhint("pg_xlogfile_name() cannot be executed during recovery."))); locationstr = text_to_cstring(location); @@ -9277,8 +9284,8 @@ XLogPageRead(XLogRecPtr *RecPtr, int emode, bool fetching_ckpt, if (readFile >= 0 && !XLByteInSeg(*RecPtr, readId, readSeg)) { /* - * Signal bgwriter to start a restartpoint if we've replayed too - * much xlog since the last one. + * Signal bgwriter to start a restartpoint if we've replayed too much + * xlog since the last one. */ if (StandbyMode && bgwriterLaunched) { @@ -9313,17 +9320,17 @@ retry: { if (WalRcvInProgress()) { - bool havedata; + bool havedata; /* * If we find an invalid record in the WAL streamed from * master, something is seriously wrong. There's little - * chance that the problem will just go away, but PANIC - * is not good for availability either, especially in - * hot standby mode. Disconnect, and retry from - * archive/pg_xlog again. The WAL in the archive should - * be identical to what was streamed, so it's unlikely - * that it helps, but one can hope... + * chance that the problem will just go away, but PANIC is + * not good for availability either, especially in hot + * standby mode. Disconnect, and retry from + * archive/pg_xlog again. The WAL in the archive should be + * identical to what was streamed, so it's unlikely that + * it helps, but one can hope... */ if (failedSources & XLOG_FROM_STREAM) { @@ -9338,8 +9345,8 @@ retry: * WAL from walreceiver and observe that we had already * processed everything before the most recent "chunk" * that it flushed to disk. In steady state where we are - * keeping up with the incoming data, XLogReceiptTime - * will be updated on each cycle. When we are behind, + * keeping up with the incoming data, XLogReceiptTime will + * be updated on each cycle. When we are behind, * XLogReceiptTime will not advance, so the grace time * alloted to conflicting queries will decrease. */ @@ -9399,8 +9406,8 @@ retry: } else { - int sources; - pg_time_t now; + int sources; + pg_time_t now; /* * Until walreceiver manages to reconnect, poll the @@ -9442,21 +9449,21 @@ retry: /* * If primary_conninfo is set, launch walreceiver to - * try to stream the missing WAL, before retrying - * to restore from archive/pg_xlog. + * try to stream the missing WAL, before retrying to + * restore from archive/pg_xlog. * * If fetching_ckpt is TRUE, RecPtr points to the * initial checkpoint location. In that case, we use - * RedoStartLSN as the streaming start position instead - * of RecPtr, so that when we later jump backwards to - * start redo at RedoStartLSN, we will have the logs - * streamed already. + * RedoStartLSN as the streaming start position + * instead of RecPtr, so that when we later jump + * backwards to start redo at RedoStartLSN, we will + * have the logs streamed already. */ if (PrimaryConnInfo) { RequestXLogStreaming( - fetching_ckpt ? RedoStartLSN : *RecPtr, - PrimaryConnInfo); + fetching_ckpt ? RedoStartLSN : *RecPtr, + PrimaryConnInfo); continue; } } @@ -9474,10 +9481,10 @@ retry: failedSources |= sources; /* - * Check to see if the trigger file exists. Note that - * we do this only after failure, so when you create - * the trigger file, we still finish replaying as much - * as we can from archive and pg_xlog before failover. + * Check to see if the trigger file exists. Note that we + * do this only after failure, so when you create the + * trigger file, we still finish replaying as much as we + * can from archive and pg_xlog before failover. */ if (CheckForStandbyTrigger()) goto triggered; @@ -9495,7 +9502,7 @@ retry: /* In archive or crash recovery. */ if (readFile < 0) { - int sources; + int sources; /* Reset curFileTLI if random fetch. */ if (randAccess) @@ -9515,8 +9522,8 @@ retry: } /* - * At this point, we have the right segment open and if we're streaming - * we know the requested record is in it. + * At this point, we have the right segment open and if we're streaming we + * know the requested record is in it. */ Assert(readFile != -1); @@ -9619,13 +9626,13 @@ triggered: * in the current WAL page, previously read by XLogPageRead(). * * 'emode' is the error mode that would be used to report a file-not-found - * or legitimate end-of-WAL situation. Generally, we use it as-is, but if + * or legitimate end-of-WAL situation. Generally, we use it as-is, but if * we're retrying the exact same record that we've tried previously, only - * complain the first time to keep the noise down. However, we only do when + * complain the first time to keep the noise down. However, we only do when * reading from pg_xlog, because we don't expect any invalid records in archive * or in records streamed from master. Files in the archive should be complete, * and we should never hit the end of WAL because we stop and wait for more WAL - * to arrive before replaying it. + * to arrive before replaying it. * * NOTE: This function remembers the RecPtr value it was last called with, * to suppress repeated messages about the same record. Only call this when diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/aclchk.c b/src/backend/catalog/aclchk.c index d0168e7dcd..0470a70273 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/aclchk.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/aclchk.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/aclchk.c,v 1.167 2010/06/13 17:43:12 rhaas Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/aclchk.c,v 1.168 2010/07/06 19:18:55 momjian Exp $ * * NOTES * See acl.h. @@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ restrict_and_check_grant(bool is_grant, AclMode avail_goptions, bool all_privs, if (is_grant) { if (this_privileges == 0) - { + { if (objkind == ACL_KIND_COLUMN && colname) ereport(WARNING, (errcode(ERRCODE_WARNING_PRIVILEGE_NOT_GRANTED), @@ -356,8 +356,8 @@ restrict_and_check_grant(bool is_grant, AclMode avail_goptions, bool all_privs, else ereport(WARNING, (errcode(ERRCODE_WARNING_PRIVILEGE_NOT_REVOKED), - errmsg("not all privileges could be revoked for \"%s\"", - objname))); + errmsg("not all privileges could be revoked for \"%s\"", + objname))); } } @@ -1089,7 +1089,7 @@ SetDefaultACL(InternalDefaultACL *iacls) /* * The default for a global entry is the hard-wired default ACL for the - * particular object type. The default for non-global entries is an empty + * particular object type. The default for non-global entries is an empty * ACL. This must be so because global entries replace the hard-wired * defaults, while others are added on. */ @@ -1188,8 +1188,8 @@ SetDefaultACL(InternalDefaultACL *iacls) /* * If the result is the same as the default value, we do not need an - * explicit pg_default_acl entry, and should in fact remove the entry - * if it exists. Must sort both arrays to compare properly. + * explicit pg_default_acl entry, and should in fact remove the entry if + * it exists. Must sort both arrays to compare properly. */ aclitemsort(new_acl); aclitemsort(def_acl); @@ -1256,7 +1256,7 @@ SetDefaultACL(InternalDefaultACL *iacls) if (OidIsValid(iacls->nspid)) { ObjectAddress myself, - referenced; + referenced; myself.classId = DefaultAclRelationId; myself.objectId = HeapTupleGetOid(newtuple); @@ -3202,8 +3202,8 @@ aclcheck_error_col(AclResult aclerr, AclObjectKind objectkind, case ACLCHECK_NO_PRIV: ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE), - errmsg("permission denied for column \"%s\" of relation \"%s\"", - colname, objectname))); + errmsg("permission denied for column \"%s\" of relation \"%s\"", + colname, objectname))); break; case ACLCHECK_NOT_OWNER: /* relation msg is OK since columns don't have separate owners */ diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/pg_proc.c b/src/backend/catalog/pg_proc.c index 05eb868aba..f60cc6106a 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/pg_proc.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/pg_proc.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_proc.c,v 1.175 2010/05/11 04:52:28 itagaki Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_proc.c,v 1.176 2010/07/06 19:18:56 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -629,7 +629,7 @@ ProcedureCreate(const char *procedureName, /* Set per-function configuration parameters */ set_items = (ArrayType *) DatumGetPointer(proconfig); - if (set_items) /* Need a new GUC nesting level */ + if (set_items) /* Need a new GUC nesting level */ { save_nestlevel = NewGUCNestLevel(); ProcessGUCArray(set_items, @@ -638,7 +638,7 @@ ProcedureCreate(const char *procedureName, GUC_ACTION_SAVE); } else - save_nestlevel = 0; /* keep compiler quiet */ + save_nestlevel = 0; /* keep compiler quiet */ OidFunctionCall1(languageValidator, ObjectIdGetDatum(retval)); diff --git a/src/backend/catalog/pg_shdepend.c b/src/backend/catalog/pg_shdepend.c index c7cc40f788..e525a551ff 100644 --- a/src/backend/catalog/pg_shdepend.c +++ b/src/backend/catalog/pg_shdepend.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_shdepend.c,v 1.42 2010/07/03 13:53:13 rhaas Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/catalog/pg_shdepend.c,v 1.43 2010/07/06 19:18:56 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -391,9 +391,9 @@ getOidListDiff(Oid *list1, int *nlist1, Oid *list2, int *nlist2) * and then insert or delete from pg_shdepend as appropiate. * * Note that we can't just insert all referenced roles blindly during GRANT, - * because we would end up with duplicate registered dependencies. We could + * because we would end up with duplicate registered dependencies. We could * check for existence of the tuples before inserting, but that seems to be - * more expensive than what we are doing here. Likewise we can't just delete + * more expensive than what we are doing here. Likewise we can't just delete * blindly during REVOKE, because the user may still have other privileges. * It is also possible that REVOKE actually adds dependencies, due to * instantiation of a formerly implicit default ACL (although at present, @@ -401,7 +401,7 @@ getOidListDiff(Oid *list1, int *nlist1, Oid *list2, int *nlist2) * * NOTE: Both input arrays must be sorted and de-duped. (Typically they * are extracted from an ACL array by aclmembers(), which takes care of - * both requirements.) The arrays are pfreed before return. + * both requirements.) The arrays are pfreed before return. */ void updateAclDependencies(Oid classId, Oid objectId, int32 objsubId, @@ -413,8 +413,8 @@ updateAclDependencies(Oid classId, Oid objectId, int32 objsubId, int i; /* - * Remove entries that are common to both lists; those represent - * existing dependencies we don't need to change. + * Remove entries that are common to both lists; those represent existing + * dependencies we don't need to change. * * OK to overwrite the inputs since we'll pfree them anyway. */ @@ -460,7 +460,7 @@ updateAclDependencies(Oid classId, Oid objectId, int32 objsubId, continue; shdepDropDependency(sdepRel, classId, objectId, objsubId, - false, /* exact match on objsubId */ + false, /* exact match on objsubId */ AuthIdRelationId, roleid, SHARED_DEPENDENCY_ACL); } diff --git a/src/backend/commands/indexcmds.c b/src/backend/commands/indexcmds.c index 86871e26a4..780dbc23ed 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/indexcmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/indexcmds.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/indexcmds.c,v 1.197 2010/06/01 00:33:23 momjian Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/indexcmds.c,v 1.198 2010/07/06 19:18:56 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -785,14 +785,14 @@ CheckMutability(Expr *expr) { /* * First run the expression through the planner. This has a couple of - * important consequences. First, function default arguments will get + * important consequences. First, function default arguments will get * inserted, which may affect volatility (consider "default now()"). * Second, inline-able functions will get inlined, which may allow us to - * conclude that the function is really less volatile than it's marked. - * As an example, polymorphic functions must be marked with the most - * volatile behavior that they have for any input type, but once we - * inline the function we may be able to conclude that it's not so - * volatile for the particular input type we're dealing with. + * conclude that the function is really less volatile than it's marked. As + * an example, polymorphic functions must be marked with the most volatile + * behavior that they have for any input type, but once we inline the + * function we may be able to conclude that it's not so volatile for the + * particular input type we're dealing with. * * We assume here that expression_planner() won't scribble on its input. */ diff --git a/src/backend/commands/opclasscmds.c b/src/backend/commands/opclasscmds.c index 1cd7223095..cae1a31546 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/opclasscmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/opclasscmds.c @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/opclasscmds.c,v 1.67 2010/07/03 13:53:13 rhaas Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/opclasscmds.c,v 1.68 2010/07/06 19:18:56 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -1954,8 +1954,8 @@ AlterOpClassOwner(List *name, const char *access_method, Oid newOwnerId) void AlterOpClassOwner_oid(Oid opclassOid, Oid newOwnerId) { - HeapTuple tup; - Relation rel; + HeapTuple tup; + Relation rel; rel = heap_open(OperatorClassRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); @@ -2097,8 +2097,8 @@ AlterOpFamilyOwner(List *name, const char *access_method, Oid newOwnerId) void AlterOpFamilyOwner_oid(Oid opfamilyOid, Oid newOwnerId) { - HeapTuple tup; - Relation rel; + HeapTuple tup; + Relation rel; rel = heap_open(OperatorFamilyRelationId, RowExclusiveLock); diff --git a/src/backend/commands/operatorcmds.c b/src/backend/commands/operatorcmds.c index 2936c92a94..fa84a9b9c8 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/operatorcmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/operatorcmds.c @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/operatorcmds.c,v 1.46 2010/06/22 11:36:16 rhaas Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/operatorcmds.c,v 1.47 2010/07/06 19:18:56 momjian Exp $ * * DESCRIPTION * The "DefineFoo" routines take the parse tree and pick out the @@ -89,9 +89,9 @@ DefineOperator(List *names, List *parameters) oprNamespace = QualifiedNameGetCreationNamespace(names, &oprName); /* - * The SQL standard committee has decided that => should be used for - * named parameters; therefore, a future release of PostgreSQL may - * disallow it as the name of a user-defined operator. + * The SQL standard committee has decided that => should be used for named + * parameters; therefore, a future release of PostgreSQL may disallow it + * as the name of a user-defined operator. */ if (strcmp(oprName, "=>") == 0) ereport(WARNING, diff --git a/src/backend/commands/tablecmds.c b/src/backend/commands/tablecmds.c index 2ed8125fd6..5f6e6fb005 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/tablecmds.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/tablecmds.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/tablecmds.c,v 1.331 2010/07/01 14:10:21 rhaas Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/tablecmds.c,v 1.332 2010/07/06 19:18:56 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -1959,8 +1959,8 @@ renameatt(Oid myrelid, /* * Renaming the columns of sequences or toast tables doesn't actually * break anything from the system's point of view, since internal - * references are by attnum. But it doesn't seem right to allow users - * to change names that are hardcoded into the system, hence the following + * references are by attnum. But it doesn't seem right to allow users to + * change names that are hardcoded into the system, hence the following * restriction. */ relkind = RelationGetForm(targetrelation)->relkind; @@ -1970,8 +1970,8 @@ renameatt(Oid myrelid, relkind != RELKIND_INDEX) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_WRONG_OBJECT_TYPE), - errmsg("\"%s\" is not a table, view, composite type or index", - RelationGetRelationName(targetrelation)))); + errmsg("\"%s\" is not a table, view, composite type or index", + RelationGetRelationName(targetrelation)))); /* * permissions checking. only the owner of a class can change its schema. @@ -7049,9 +7049,9 @@ copy_relation_data(SMgrRelation src, SMgrRelation dst, for (blkno = 0; blkno < nblocks; blkno++) { - /* If we got a cancel signal during the copy of the data, quit */ - CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS(); - + /* If we got a cancel signal during the copy of the data, quit */ + CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS(); + smgrread(src, forkNum, blkno, buf); /* XLOG stuff */ diff --git a/src/backend/commands/tablespace.c b/src/backend/commands/tablespace.c index 24d15304f5..93f6fa0394 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/tablespace.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/tablespace.c @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/tablespace.c,v 1.75 2010/07/02 02:44:32 momjian Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/tablespace.c,v 1.76 2010/07/06 19:18:56 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -554,7 +554,7 @@ create_tablespace_directories(const char *location, const Oid tablespaceoid) (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_FILE), errmsg("directory \"%s\" does not exist", location), InRecovery ? errhint("Create directory \"%s\" for this tablespace before " - "restarting the server.", location) : 0)); + "restarting the server.", location) : 0)); else ereport(ERROR, (errcode_for_file_access(), diff --git a/src/backend/commands/vacuumlazy.c b/src/backend/commands/vacuumlazy.c index 8a135f34af..b3e74a6217 100644 --- a/src/backend/commands/vacuumlazy.c +++ b/src/backend/commands/vacuumlazy.c @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/vacuumlazy.c,v 1.135 2010/04/22 02:15:45 sriggs Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/commands/vacuumlazy.c,v 1.136 2010/07/06 19:18:56 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -399,9 +399,11 @@ lazy_scan_heap(Relation onerel, LVRelStats *vacrelstats, vacrelstats); /* Remove tuples from heap */ lazy_vacuum_heap(onerel, vacrelstats); + /* * Forget the now-vacuumed tuples, and press on, but be careful - * not to reset latestRemovedXid since we want that value to be valid. + * not to reset latestRemovedXid since we want that value to be + * valid. */ vacrelstats->num_dead_tuples = 0; vacrelstats->num_index_scans++; @@ -491,7 +493,8 @@ lazy_scan_heap(Relation onerel, LVRelStats *vacrelstats, * We count tuples removed by the pruning step as removed by VACUUM. */ tups_vacuumed += heap_page_prune(onerel, buf, OldestXmin, false, - &vacrelstats->latestRemovedXid); + &vacrelstats->latestRemovedXid); + /* * Now scan the page to collect vacuumable items and check for tuples * requiring freezing. @@ -682,9 +685,11 @@ lazy_scan_heap(Relation onerel, LVRelStats *vacrelstats, { /* Remove tuples from heap */ lazy_vacuum_page(onerel, blkno, buf, 0, vacrelstats); + /* * Forget the now-vacuumed tuples, and press on, but be careful - * not to reset latestRemovedXid since we want that value to be valid. + * not to reset latestRemovedXid since we want that value to be + * valid. */ vacrelstats->num_dead_tuples = 0; vacuumed_pages++; diff --git a/src/backend/executor/execUtils.c b/src/backend/executor/execUtils.c index eff6529b74..5886c1bbd6 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/execUtils.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/execUtils.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execUtils.c,v 1.172 2010/05/29 02:32:08 momjian Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/execUtils.c,v 1.173 2010/07/06 19:18:56 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -1310,8 +1310,8 @@ retry: /* * We should have found our tuple in the index, unless we exited the loop - * early because of conflict. Complain if not. If we ever implement - * '<>' index opclasses, this check will fail and will have to be removed. + * early because of conflict. Complain if not. If we ever implement '<>' + * index opclasses, this check will fail and will have to be removed. */ if (!found_self && !conflict) ereport(ERROR, diff --git a/src/backend/executor/functions.c b/src/backend/executor/functions.c index 1f6d530f91..ea2cfc9e66 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/functions.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/functions.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/functions.c,v 1.143 2010/03/19 22:54:40 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/functions.c,v 1.144 2010/07/06 19:18:56 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -939,9 +939,9 @@ sql_exec_error_callback(void *arg) else { /* - * Assume we failed during init_sql_fcache(). (It's possible that - * the function actually has an empty body, but in that case we may - * as well report all errors as being "during startup".) + * Assume we failed during init_sql_fcache(). (It's possible that the + * function actually has an empty body, but in that case we may as + * well report all errors as being "during startup".) */ errcontext("SQL function \"%s\" during startup", fcache->fname); } diff --git a/src/backend/executor/nodeMergejoin.c b/src/backend/executor/nodeMergejoin.c index e3b736f907..948f580095 100644 --- a/src/backend/executor/nodeMergejoin.c +++ b/src/backend/executor/nodeMergejoin.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeMergejoin.c,v 1.102 2010/05/28 01:14:03 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/executor/nodeMergejoin.c,v 1.103 2010/07/06 19:18:56 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -252,7 +252,7 @@ MJExamineQuals(List *mergeclauses, * input, since we assume mergejoin operators are strict. If the NULL * is in the first join column, and that column sorts nulls last, then * we can further conclude that no following tuple can match anything - * either, since they must all have nulls in the first column. However, + * either, since they must all have nulls in the first column. However, * that case is only interesting if we're not in FillOuter mode, else * we have to visit all the tuples anyway. * @@ -748,6 +748,7 @@ ExecMergeJoin(MergeJoinState *node) switch (MJEvalInnerValues(node, innerTupleSlot)) { case MJEVAL_MATCHABLE: + /* * OK, we have the initial tuples. Begin by skipping * non-matching tuples. @@ -922,6 +923,7 @@ ExecMergeJoin(MergeJoinState *node) switch (MJEvalInnerValues(node, innerTupleSlot)) { case MJEVAL_MATCHABLE: + /* * Test the new inner tuple to see if it matches * outer. @@ -944,6 +946,7 @@ ExecMergeJoin(MergeJoinState *node) } break; case MJEVAL_NONMATCHABLE: + /* * It contains a NULL and hence can't match any outer * tuple, so we can skip the comparison and assume the @@ -952,10 +955,11 @@ ExecMergeJoin(MergeJoinState *node) node->mj_JoinState = EXEC_MJ_NEXTOUTER; break; case MJEVAL_ENDOFJOIN: + /* - * No more inner tuples. However, this might be - * only effective and not physical end of inner plan, - * so force mj_InnerTupleSlot to null to make sure we + * No more inner tuples. However, this might be only + * effective and not physical end of inner plan, so + * force mj_InnerTupleSlot to null to make sure we * don't fetch more inner tuples. (We need this hack * because we are not transiting to a state where the * inner plan is assumed to be exhausted.) @@ -1152,9 +1156,11 @@ ExecMergeJoin(MergeJoinState *node) node->mj_JoinState = EXEC_MJ_SKIP_TEST; break; case MJEVAL_NONMATCHABLE: + /* * current inner can't possibly match any outer; - * better to advance the inner scan than the outer. + * better to advance the inner scan than the + * outer. */ node->mj_JoinState = EXEC_MJ_SKIPINNER_ADVANCE; break; @@ -1337,6 +1343,7 @@ ExecMergeJoin(MergeJoinState *node) node->mj_JoinState = EXEC_MJ_SKIP_TEST; break; case MJEVAL_NONMATCHABLE: + /* * current inner can't possibly match any outer; * better to advance the inner scan than the outer. diff --git a/src/backend/lib/stringinfo.c b/src/backend/lib/stringinfo.c index 9ae2455000..ea0c5f052c 100644 --- a/src/backend/lib/stringinfo.c +++ b/src/backend/lib/stringinfo.c @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/lib/stringinfo.c,v 1.53 2010/05/08 16:39:49 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/lib/stringinfo.c,v 1.54 2010/07/06 19:18:56 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -226,8 +226,8 @@ appendBinaryStringInfo(StringInfo str, const char *data, int datalen) /* * Keep a trailing null in place, even though it's probably useless for - * binary data. (Some callers are dealing with text but call this - * because their input isn't null-terminated.) + * binary data. (Some callers are dealing with text but call this because + * their input isn't null-terminated.) */ str->data[str->len] = '\0'; } diff --git a/src/backend/libpq/auth.c b/src/backend/libpq/auth.c index 5648a45dfe..ec75945e85 100644 --- a/src/backend/libpq/auth.c +++ b/src/backend/libpq/auth.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/auth.c,v 1.202 2010/06/29 04:12:47 petere Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/auth.c,v 1.203 2010/07/06 19:18:56 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@ static int pg_GSS_recvauth(Port *port); *---------------------------------------------------------------- */ #ifdef ENABLE_SSPI -typedef SECURITY_STATUS +typedef SECURITY_STATUS (WINAPI * QUERY_SECURITY_CONTEXT_TOKEN_FN) ( PCtxtHandle, void **); static int pg_SSPI_recvauth(Port *port); @@ -233,8 +233,8 @@ static void auth_failed(Port *port, int status) { const char *errstr; - int errcode_return = ERRCODE_INVALID_AUTHORIZATION_SPECIFICATION; - + int errcode_return = ERRCODE_INVALID_AUTHORIZATION_SPECIFICATION; + /* * If we failed due to EOF from client, just quit; there's no point in * trying to send a message to the client, and not much point in logging @@ -369,13 +369,13 @@ ClientAuthentication(Port *port) /* * An explicit "reject" entry in pg_hba.conf. This report exposes - * the fact that there's an explicit reject entry, which is perhaps - * not so desirable from a security standpoint; but the message - * for an implicit reject could confuse the DBA a lot when the - * true situation is a match to an explicit reject. And we don't - * want to change the message for an implicit reject. As noted - * below, the additional information shown here doesn't expose - * anything not known to an attacker. + * the fact that there's an explicit reject entry, which is + * perhaps not so desirable from a security standpoint; but the + * message for an implicit reject could confuse the DBA a lot when + * the true situation is a match to an explicit reject. And we + * don't want to change the message for an implicit reject. As + * noted below, the additional information shown here doesn't + * expose anything not known to an attacker. */ { char hostinfo[NI_MAXHOST]; @@ -389,32 +389,32 @@ ClientAuthentication(Port *port) { #ifdef USE_SSL ereport(FATAL, - (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_AUTHORIZATION_SPECIFICATION), - errmsg("pg_hba.conf rejects replication connection for host \"%s\", user \"%s\", %s", - hostinfo, port->user_name, - port->ssl ? _("SSL on") : _("SSL off")))); + (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_AUTHORIZATION_SPECIFICATION), + errmsg("pg_hba.conf rejects replication connection for host \"%s\", user \"%s\", %s", + hostinfo, port->user_name, + port->ssl ? _("SSL on") : _("SSL off")))); #else ereport(FATAL, - (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_AUTHORIZATION_SPECIFICATION), - errmsg("pg_hba.conf rejects replication connection for host \"%s\", user \"%s\"", - hostinfo, port->user_name))); + (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_AUTHORIZATION_SPECIFICATION), + errmsg("pg_hba.conf rejects replication connection for host \"%s\", user \"%s\"", + hostinfo, port->user_name))); #endif } else { #ifdef USE_SSL ereport(FATAL, - (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_AUTHORIZATION_SPECIFICATION), - errmsg("pg_hba.conf rejects connection for host \"%s\", user \"%s\", database \"%s\", %s", - hostinfo, port->user_name, - port->database_name, - port->ssl ? _("SSL on") : _("SSL off")))); + (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_AUTHORIZATION_SPECIFICATION), + errmsg("pg_hba.conf rejects connection for host \"%s\", user \"%s\", database \"%s\", %s", + hostinfo, port->user_name, + port->database_name, + port->ssl ? _("SSL on") : _("SSL off")))); #else ereport(FATAL, - (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_AUTHORIZATION_SPECIFICATION), - errmsg("pg_hba.conf rejects connection for host \"%s\", user \"%s\", database \"%s\"", - hostinfo, port->user_name, - port->database_name))); + (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_AUTHORIZATION_SPECIFICATION), + errmsg("pg_hba.conf rejects connection for host \"%s\", user \"%s\", database \"%s\"", + hostinfo, port->user_name, + port->database_name))); #endif } break; @@ -442,32 +442,32 @@ ClientAuthentication(Port *port) { #ifdef USE_SSL ereport(FATAL, - (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_AUTHORIZATION_SPECIFICATION), - errmsg("no pg_hba.conf entry for replication connection from host \"%s\", user \"%s\", %s", - hostinfo, port->user_name, - port->ssl ? _("SSL on") : _("SSL off")))); + (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_AUTHORIZATION_SPECIFICATION), + errmsg("no pg_hba.conf entry for replication connection from host \"%s\", user \"%s\", %s", + hostinfo, port->user_name, + port->ssl ? _("SSL on") : _("SSL off")))); #else ereport(FATAL, - (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_AUTHORIZATION_SPECIFICATION), - errmsg("no pg_hba.conf entry for replication connection from host \"%s\", user \"%s\"", - hostinfo, port->user_name))); + (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_AUTHORIZATION_SPECIFICATION), + errmsg("no pg_hba.conf entry for replication connection from host \"%s\", user \"%s\"", + hostinfo, port->user_name))); #endif } else { #ifdef USE_SSL ereport(FATAL, - (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_AUTHORIZATION_SPECIFICATION), - errmsg("no pg_hba.conf entry for host \"%s\", user \"%s\", database \"%s\", %s", - hostinfo, port->user_name, - port->database_name, - port->ssl ? _("SSL on") : _("SSL off")))); + (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_AUTHORIZATION_SPECIFICATION), + errmsg("no pg_hba.conf entry for host \"%s\", user \"%s\", database \"%s\", %s", + hostinfo, port->user_name, + port->database_name, + port->ssl ? _("SSL on") : _("SSL off")))); #else ereport(FATAL, - (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_AUTHORIZATION_SPECIFICATION), - errmsg("no pg_hba.conf entry for host \"%s\", user \"%s\", database \"%s\"", - hostinfo, port->user_name, - port->database_name))); + (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_AUTHORIZATION_SPECIFICATION), + errmsg("no pg_hba.conf entry for host \"%s\", user \"%s\", database \"%s\"", + hostinfo, port->user_name, + port->database_name))); #endif } break; @@ -2781,7 +2781,7 @@ CheckRADIUSAuth(Port *port) timeout.tv_sec = RADIUS_TIMEOUT; timeout.tv_usec = 0; FD_ZERO(&fdset); - FD_SET (sock, &fdset); + FD_SET(sock, &fdset); while (true) { @@ -2904,8 +2904,8 @@ CheckRADIUSAuth(Port *port) else { ereport(LOG, - (errmsg("RADIUS response has invalid code (%i) for user \"%s\"", - receivepacket->code, port->user_name))); + (errmsg("RADIUS response has invalid code (%i) for user \"%s\"", + receivepacket->code, port->user_name))); return STATUS_ERROR; } } diff --git a/src/backend/libpq/be-secure.c b/src/backend/libpq/be-secure.c index f74f8f9275..b7000a653a 100644 --- a/src/backend/libpq/be-secure.c +++ b/src/backend/libpq/be-secure.c @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/be-secure.c,v 1.101 2010/05/26 16:15:57 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/be-secure.c,v 1.102 2010/07/06 19:18:56 momjian Exp $ * * Since the server static private key ($DataDir/server.key) * will normally be stored unencrypted so that the database @@ -500,7 +500,7 @@ err: * to verify that the DBA-generated DH parameters file contains * what we expect it to contain. */ -static DH * +static DH * load_dh_file(int keylength) { FILE *fp; @@ -558,7 +558,7 @@ load_dh_file(int keylength) * To prevent problems if the DH parameters files don't even * exist, we can load DH parameters hardcoded into this file. */ -static DH * +static DH * load_dh_buffer(const char *buffer, size_t len) { BIO *bio; @@ -590,7 +590,7 @@ load_dh_buffer(const char *buffer, size_t len) * the OpenSSL library can efficiently generate random keys from * the information provided. */ -static DH * +static DH * tmp_dh_cb(SSL *s, int is_export, int keylength) { DH *r = NULL; @@ -720,6 +720,7 @@ static void initialize_SSL(void) { struct stat buf; + STACK_OF(X509_NAME) *root_cert_list = NULL; if (!SSL_context) @@ -809,7 +810,7 @@ initialize_SSL(void) ROOT_CERT_FILE))); } else if (SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(SSL_context, ROOT_CERT_FILE, NULL) != 1 || - (root_cert_list = SSL_load_client_CA_file(ROOT_CERT_FILE)) == NULL) + (root_cert_list = SSL_load_client_CA_file(ROOT_CERT_FILE)) == NULL) { /* * File was there, but we could not load it. This means the file is @@ -867,7 +868,7 @@ initialize_SSL(void) ssl_loaded_verify_locations = true; } - /* + /* * Tell OpenSSL to send the list of root certs we trust to clients in * CertificateRequests. This lets a client with a keystore select the * appropriate client certificate to send to us. diff --git a/src/backend/libpq/hba.c b/src/backend/libpq/hba.c index 02b57920f8..4e1cff3502 100644 --- a/src/backend/libpq/hba.c +++ b/src/backend/libpq/hba.c @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/hba.c,v 1.208 2010/06/03 19:29:38 petere Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/libpq/hba.c,v 1.209 2010/07/06 19:18:56 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -711,7 +711,7 @@ parse_hba_line(List *line, int line_num, HbaLine *parsedline) ereport(LOG, (errcode(ERRCODE_CONFIG_FILE_ERROR), errmsg("hostssl not supported on this platform"), - errhint("Compile with --with-openssl to use SSL connections."), + errhint("Compile with --with-openssl to use SSL connections."), errcontext("line %d of configuration file \"%s\"", line_num, HbaFileName))); return false; @@ -891,8 +891,8 @@ parse_hba_line(List *line, int line_num, HbaLine *parsedline) ereport(LOG, (errcode(ERRCODE_CONFIG_FILE_ERROR), errmsg("IP address and mask do not match"), - errcontext("line %d of configuration file \"%s\"", - line_num, HbaFileName))); + errcontext("line %d of configuration file \"%s\"", + line_num, HbaFileName))); return false; } } @@ -1011,14 +1011,15 @@ parse_hba_line(List *line, int line_num, HbaLine *parsedline) { ereport(LOG, (errcode(ERRCODE_CONFIG_FILE_ERROR), - errmsg("gssapi authentication is not supported on local sockets"), + errmsg("gssapi authentication is not supported on local sockets"), errcontext("line %d of configuration file \"%s\"", line_num, HbaFileName))); return false; } + /* - * SSPI authentication can never be enabled on ctLocal connections, because - * it's only supported on Windows, where ctLocal isn't supported. + * SSPI authentication can never be enabled on ctLocal connections, + * because it's only supported on Windows, where ctLocal isn't supported. */ @@ -1248,8 +1249,8 @@ parse_hba_line(List *line, int line_num, HbaLine *parsedline) { ereport(LOG, (errcode(ERRCODE_CONFIG_FILE_ERROR), - errmsg("unrecognized authentication option name: \"%s\"", - token), + errmsg("unrecognized authentication option name: \"%s\"", + token), errcontext("line %d of configuration file \"%s\"", line_num, HbaFileName))); return false; @@ -1633,8 +1634,8 @@ parse_ident_usermap(List *line, int line_number, const char *usermap_name, pg_regerror(r, &re, errstr, sizeof(errstr)); ereport(LOG, (errcode(ERRCODE_INVALID_REGULAR_EXPRESSION), - errmsg("regular expression match for \"%s\" failed: %s", - file_ident_user + 1, errstr))); + errmsg("regular expression match for \"%s\" failed: %s", + file_ident_user + 1, errstr))); *error_p = true; } diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/path/costsize.c b/src/backend/optimizer/path/costsize.c index 1f8dfa8547..6f16eb81dc 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/path/costsize.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/path/costsize.c @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/path/costsize.c,v 1.217 2010/04/19 00:55:25 rhaas Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/path/costsize.c,v 1.218 2010/07/06 19:18:56 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -1854,8 +1854,8 @@ cost_mergejoin(MergePath *path, PlannerInfo *root, SpecialJoinInfo *sjinfo) cpu_operator_cost * inner_path_rows * rescanratio; /* - * Prefer materializing if it looks cheaper, unless the user has asked - * to suppress materialization. + * Prefer materializing if it looks cheaper, unless the user has asked to + * suppress materialization. */ if (enable_material && mat_inner_cost < bare_inner_cost) path->materialize_inner = true; @@ -1872,9 +1872,9 @@ cost_mergejoin(MergePath *path, PlannerInfo *root, SpecialJoinInfo *sjinfo) * selected as the input of a mergejoin, and they don't support * mark/restore at present. * - * We don't test the value of enable_material here, because materialization - * is required for correctness in this case, and turning it off does not - * entitle us to deliver an invalid plan. + * We don't test the value of enable_material here, because + * materialization is required for correctness in this case, and turning + * it off does not entitle us to deliver an invalid plan. */ else if (innersortkeys == NIL && !ExecSupportsMarkRestore(inner_path->pathtype)) @@ -1887,8 +1887,9 @@ cost_mergejoin(MergePath *path, PlannerInfo *root, SpecialJoinInfo *sjinfo) * We don't try to adjust the cost estimates for this consideration, * though. * - * Since materialization is a performance optimization in this case, rather - * than necessary for correctness, we skip it if enable_material is off. + * Since materialization is a performance optimization in this case, + * rather than necessary for correctness, we skip it if enable_material is + * off. */ else if (enable_material && innersortkeys != NIL && relation_byte_size(inner_path_rows, inner_path->parent->width) > diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/analyzejoins.c b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/analyzejoins.c index a06e647f4b..0d90d072ea 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/analyzejoins.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/analyzejoins.c @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/plan/analyzejoins.c,v 1.2 2010/05/23 16:34:38 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/plan/analyzejoins.c,v 1.3 2010/07/06 19:18:56 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ static List *remove_rel_from_joinlist(List *joinlist, int relid, int *nremoved); * Check for relations that don't actually need to be joined at all, * and remove them from the query. * - * We are passed the current joinlist and return the updated list. Other + * We are passed the current joinlist and return the updated list. Other * data structures that have to be updated are accessible via "root". */ List * @@ -46,15 +46,15 @@ remove_useless_joins(PlannerInfo *root, List *joinlist) ListCell *lc; /* - * We are only interested in relations that are left-joined to, so we - * can scan the join_info_list to find them easily. + * We are only interested in relations that are left-joined to, so we can + * scan the join_info_list to find them easily. */ restart: foreach(lc, root->join_info_list) { SpecialJoinInfo *sjinfo = (SpecialJoinInfo *) lfirst(lc); - int innerrelid; - int nremoved; + int innerrelid; + int nremoved; /* Skip if not removable */ if (!join_is_removable(root, sjinfo)) @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ restart: * Restart the scan. This is necessary to ensure we find all * removable joins independently of ordering of the join_info_list * (note that removal of attr_needed bits may make a join appear - * removable that did not before). Also, since we just deleted the + * removable that did not before). Also, since we just deleted the * current list cell, we'd have to have some kluge to continue the * list scan anyway. */ @@ -328,7 +328,7 @@ remove_rel_from_query(PlannerInfo *root, int relid) if (otherrel == NULL) continue; - Assert(otherrel->relid == rti); /* sanity check on array */ + Assert(otherrel->relid == rti); /* sanity check on array */ /* no point in processing target rel itself */ if (otherrel == rel) @@ -346,10 +346,10 @@ remove_rel_from_query(PlannerInfo *root, int relid) /* * Likewise remove references from SpecialJoinInfo data structures. * - * This is relevant in case the outer join we're deleting is nested - * inside other outer joins: the upper joins' relid sets have to be - * adjusted. The RHS of the target outer join will be made empty here, - * but that's OK since caller will delete that SpecialJoinInfo entirely. + * This is relevant in case the outer join we're deleting is nested inside + * other outer joins: the upper joins' relid sets have to be adjusted. + * The RHS of the target outer join will be made empty here, but that's OK + * since caller will delete that SpecialJoinInfo entirely. */ foreach(l, root->join_info_list) { @@ -374,7 +374,7 @@ remove_rel_from_query(PlannerInfo *root, int relid) PlaceHolderInfo *phinfo = (PlaceHolderInfo *) lfirst(l); phinfo->ph_eval_at = bms_del_member(phinfo->ph_eval_at, relid); - if (bms_is_empty(phinfo->ph_eval_at)) /* oops, belay that */ + if (bms_is_empty(phinfo->ph_eval_at)) /* oops, belay that */ phinfo->ph_eval_at = bms_add_member(phinfo->ph_eval_at, relid); phinfo->ph_needed = bms_del_member(phinfo->ph_needed, relid); @@ -412,7 +412,7 @@ remove_rel_from_joinlist(List *joinlist, int relid, int *nremoved) else if (IsA(jlnode, List)) { /* Recurse to handle subproblem */ - List *sublist; + List *sublist; sublist = remove_rel_from_joinlist((List *) jlnode, relid, nremoved); diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planagg.c b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planagg.c index 104ec53e5f..369ed9c929 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planagg.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planagg.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planagg.c,v 1.52 2010/05/10 16:25:46 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planagg.c,v 1.53 2010/07/06 19:18:56 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -654,8 +654,8 @@ attach_notnull_index_qual(MinMaxAggInfo *info, IndexScan *iplan) RowCompareExpr *rc = (RowCompareExpr *) qual; /* - * Examine just the first column of the rowcompare, which is - * what determines its placement in the overall qual list. + * Examine just the first column of the rowcompare, which is what + * determines its placement in the overall qual list. */ leftop = (Expr *) linitial(rc->largs); diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planmain.c b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planmain.c index f93205bbaa..ad6c6f5858 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planmain.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planmain.c @@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planmain.c,v 1.118 2010/03/28 22:59:33 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/plan/planmain.c,v 1.119 2010/07/06 19:18:56 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ query_planner(PlannerInfo *root, List *tlist, fix_placeholder_eval_levels(root); /* - * Remove any useless outer joins. Ideally this would be done during + * Remove any useless outer joins. Ideally this would be done during * jointree preprocessing, but the necessary information isn't available * until we've built baserel data structures and classified qual clauses. */ diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepjointree.c b/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepjointree.c index 2f872e546c..dbe7836b42 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepjointree.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepjointree.c @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepjointree.c,v 1.72 2010/06/21 00:14:48 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepjointree.c,v 1.73 2010/07/06 19:18:56 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -1315,7 +1315,7 @@ pullup_replace_vars_callback(Var *var, &colnames, &fields); /* Adjust the generated per-field Vars, but don't insert PHVs */ rcon->need_phvs = false; - context->sublevels_up = 0; /* to match the expandRTE output */ + context->sublevels_up = 0; /* to match the expandRTE output */ fields = (List *) replace_rte_variables_mutator((Node *) fields, context); rcon->need_phvs = save_need_phvs; diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepunion.c b/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepunion.c index 409b8a1b7c..3cb5ed977b 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepunion.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepunion.c @@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepunion.c,v 1.182 2010/05/11 15:31:37 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/prep/prepunion.c,v 1.183 2010/07/06 19:18:56 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -1268,8 +1268,8 @@ expand_inherited_rtentry(PlannerInfo *root, RangeTblEntry *rte, Index rti) * if this is the parent table, leave copyObject's result alone. * * Note: we need to do this even though the executor won't run any - * permissions checks on the child RTE. The modifiedCols bitmap - * may be examined for trigger-firing purposes. + * permissions checks on the child RTE. The modifiedCols bitmap may + * be examined for trigger-firing purposes. */ if (childOID != parentOID) { diff --git a/src/backend/optimizer/util/placeholder.c b/src/backend/optimizer/util/placeholder.c index 7bf34129f3..837a0c64b3 100644 --- a/src/backend/optimizer/util/placeholder.c +++ b/src/backend/optimizer/util/placeholder.c @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/util/placeholder.c,v 1.7 2010/03/28 22:59:33 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/optimizer/util/placeholder.c,v 1.8 2010/07/06 19:18:57 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ fix_placeholder_eval_levels(PlannerInfo *root) * If any placeholder can be computed at a base rel and is needed above it, * add it to that rel's targetlist. We have to do this separately from * fix_placeholder_eval_levels() because join removal happens in between, - * and can change the ph_eval_at sets. There is essentially the same logic + * and can change the ph_eval_at sets. There is essentially the same logic * in add_placeholders_to_joinrel, but we can't do that part until joinrels * are formed. */ diff --git a/src/backend/parser/parse_expr.c b/src/backend/parser/parse_expr.c index 3d960089c3..5d4a3244c1 100644 --- a/src/backend/parser/parse_expr.c +++ b/src/backend/parser/parse_expr.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_expr.c,v 1.255 2010/06/30 18:10:23 heikki Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/parse_expr.c,v 1.256 2010/07/06 19:18:57 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -1226,60 +1226,61 @@ transformFuncCall(ParseState *pstate, FuncCall *fn) /* ... and hand off to ParseFuncOrColumn */ result = ParseFuncOrColumn(pstate, - fn->funcname, - targs, - fn->agg_order, - fn->agg_star, - fn->agg_distinct, - fn->func_variadic, - fn->over, - false, - fn->location); + fn->funcname, + targs, + fn->agg_order, + fn->agg_star, + fn->agg_distinct, + fn->func_variadic, + fn->over, + false, + fn->location); /* * pg_get_expr() is a system function that exposes the expression - * deparsing functionality in ruleutils.c to users. Very handy, but - * it was later realized that the functions in ruleutils.c don't check - * the input rigorously, assuming it to come from system catalogs and - * to therefore be valid. That makes it easy for a user to crash the - * backend by passing a maliciously crafted string representation of - * an expression to pg_get_expr(). + * deparsing functionality in ruleutils.c to users. Very handy, but it was + * later realized that the functions in ruleutils.c don't check the input + * rigorously, assuming it to come from system catalogs and to therefore + * be valid. That makes it easy for a user to crash the backend by passing + * a maliciously crafted string representation of an expression to + * pg_get_expr(). * * There's a lot of code in ruleutils.c, so it's not feasible to add - * water-proof input checking after the fact. Even if we did it once, - * it would need to be taken into account in any future patches too. + * water-proof input checking after the fact. Even if we did it once, it + * would need to be taken into account in any future patches too. * * Instead, we restrict pg_rule_expr() to only allow input from system * catalogs instead. This is a hack, but it's the most robust and easiest * to backpatch way of plugging the vulnerability. * * This is transparent to the typical usage pattern of - * "pg_get_expr(systemcolumn, ...)", but will break - * "pg_get_expr('foo', ...)", even if 'foo' is a valid expression fetched - * earlier from a system catalog. Hopefully there's isn't many clients - * doing that out there. + * "pg_get_expr(systemcolumn, ...)", but will break "pg_get_expr('foo', + * ...)", even if 'foo' is a valid expression fetched earlier from a + * system catalog. Hopefully there's isn't many clients doing that out + * there. */ - if (result && IsA(result, FuncExpr) && !superuser()) + if (result && IsA(result, FuncExpr) &&!superuser()) { - FuncExpr *fe = (FuncExpr *) result; + FuncExpr *fe = (FuncExpr *) result; + if (fe->funcid == F_PG_GET_EXPR || fe->funcid == F_PG_GET_EXPR_EXT) { - Expr *arg = linitial(fe->args); - bool allowed = false; + Expr *arg = linitial(fe->args); + bool allowed = false; /* - * Check that the argument came directly from one of the - * allowed system catalog columns + * Check that the argument came directly from one of the allowed + * system catalog columns */ if (IsA(arg, Var)) { - Var *var = (Var *) arg; + Var *var = (Var *) arg; RangeTblEntry *rte; rte = GetRTEByRangeTablePosn(pstate, var->varno, var->varlevelsup); - switch(rte->relid) + switch (rte->relid) { case IndexRelationId: if (var->varattno == Anum_pg_index_indexprs || diff --git a/src/backend/parser/scansup.c b/src/backend/parser/scansup.c index 94082f77a0..f1bb4370fe 100644 --- a/src/backend/parser/scansup.c +++ b/src/backend/parser/scansup.c @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/scansup.c,v 1.41 2010/05/09 02:15:59 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/parser/scansup.c,v 1.42 2010/07/06 19:18:57 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ truncate_identifier(char *ident, int len, bool warn) * We avoid using %.*s here because it can misbehave if the data * is not valid in what libc thinks is the prevailing encoding. */ - char buf[NAMEDATALEN]; + char buf[NAMEDATALEN]; memcpy(buf, ident, len); buf[len] = '\0'; diff --git a/src/backend/port/sysv_shmem.c b/src/backend/port/sysv_shmem.c index 8cdabf244b..0138503274 100644 --- a/src/backend/port/sysv_shmem.c +++ b/src/backend/port/sysv_shmem.c @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/port/sysv_shmem.c,v 1.56 2010/05/01 22:46:30 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/port/sysv_shmem.c,v 1.57 2010/07/06 19:18:57 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -93,17 +93,17 @@ InternalIpcMemoryCreate(IpcMemoryKey memKey, Size size) return NULL; /* - * Some BSD-derived kernels are known to return EINVAL, not EEXIST, - * if there is an existing segment but it's smaller than "size" - * (this is a result of poorly-thought-out ordering of error tests). - * To distinguish between collision and invalid size in such cases, - * we make a second try with size = 0. These kernels do not test - * size against SHMMIN in the preexisting-segment case, so we will - * not get EINVAL a second time if there is such a segment. + * Some BSD-derived kernels are known to return EINVAL, not EEXIST, if + * there is an existing segment but it's smaller than "size" (this is + * a result of poorly-thought-out ordering of error tests). To + * distinguish between collision and invalid size in such cases, we + * make a second try with size = 0. These kernels do not test size + * against SHMMIN in the preexisting-segment case, so we will not get + * EINVAL a second time if there is such a segment. */ if (errno == EINVAL) { - int save_errno = errno; + int save_errno = errno; shmid = shmget(memKey, 0, IPC_CREAT | IPC_EXCL | IPCProtection); @@ -122,9 +122,9 @@ InternalIpcMemoryCreate(IpcMemoryKey memKey, Size size) { /* * On most platforms we cannot get here because SHMMIN is - * greater than zero. However, if we do succeed in creating - * a zero-size segment, free it and then fall through to - * report the original error. + * greater than zero. However, if we do succeed in creating a + * zero-size segment, free it and then fall through to report + * the original error. */ if (shmctl(shmid, IPC_RMID, NULL) < 0) elog(LOG, "shmctl(%d, %d, 0) failed: %m", diff --git a/src/backend/port/win32/socket.c b/src/backend/port/win32/socket.c index 3355606e45..6c7d327c6f 100644 --- a/src/backend/port/win32/socket.c +++ b/src/backend/port/win32/socket.c @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/port/win32/socket.c,v 1.26 2010/02/26 02:00:53 momjian Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/port/win32/socket.c,v 1.27 2010/07/06 19:18:57 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -457,7 +457,7 @@ pgwin32_select(int nfds, fd_set *readfds, fd_set *writefds, fd_set *exceptfds, c r = WSASend(writefds->fd_array[i], &buf, 1, &sent, 0, NULL, NULL); if (r == 0) /* Completed - means things are fine! */ - FD_SET (writefds->fd_array[i], &outwritefds); + FD_SET(writefds->fd_array[i], &outwritefds); else { /* Not completed */ @@ -467,7 +467,7 @@ pgwin32_select(int nfds, fd_set *readfds, fd_set *writefds, fd_set *exceptfds, c * Not completed, and not just "would block", so an error * occured */ - FD_SET (writefds->fd_array[i], &outwritefds); + FD_SET(writefds->fd_array[i], &outwritefds); } } if (outwritefds.fd_count > 0) @@ -554,7 +554,7 @@ pgwin32_select(int nfds, fd_set *readfds, fd_set *writefds, fd_set *exceptfds, c (resEvents.lNetworkEvents & FD_ACCEPT) || (resEvents.lNetworkEvents & FD_CLOSE)) { - FD_SET (sockets[i], &outreadfds); + FD_SET(sockets[i], &outreadfds); nummatches++; } @@ -565,7 +565,7 @@ pgwin32_select(int nfds, fd_set *readfds, fd_set *writefds, fd_set *exceptfds, c if ((resEvents.lNetworkEvents & FD_WRITE) || (resEvents.lNetworkEvents & FD_CLOSE)) { - FD_SET (sockets[i], &outwritefds); + FD_SET(sockets[i], &outwritefds); nummatches++; } diff --git a/src/backend/port/win32/timer.c b/src/backend/port/win32/timer.c index 898bd95e1d..c2711fb092 100644 --- a/src/backend/port/win32/timer.c +++ b/src/backend/port/win32/timer.c @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/port/win32/timer.c,v 1.18 2010/01/02 16:57:50 momjian Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/port/win32/timer.c,v 1.19 2010/07/06 19:18:57 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ typedef struct timerCA struct itimerval value; HANDLE event; CRITICAL_SECTION crit_sec; -} timerCA; +} timerCA; static timerCA timerCommArea; static HANDLE timerThreadHandle = INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE; diff --git a/src/backend/postmaster/pgstat.c b/src/backend/postmaster/pgstat.c index 5c3d700d29..29dd1a7848 100644 --- a/src/backend/postmaster/pgstat.c +++ b/src/backend/postmaster/pgstat.c @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ * * Copyright (c) 2001-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/postmaster/pgstat.c,v 1.203 2010/03/24 16:07:10 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/postmaster/pgstat.c,v 1.204 2010/07/06 19:18:57 momjian Exp $ * ---------- */ #include "postgres.h" @@ -431,7 +431,7 @@ retry1: for (;;) /* need a loop to handle EINTR */ { FD_ZERO(&rset); - FD_SET (pgStatSock, &rset); + FD_SET(pgStatSock, &rset); tv.tv_sec = 0; tv.tv_usec = 500000; @@ -2891,7 +2891,7 @@ PgstatCollectorMain(int argc, char *argv[]) got_data = (input_fd.revents != 0); #else /* !HAVE_POLL */ - FD_SET (pgStatSock, &rfds); + FD_SET(pgStatSock, &rfds); /* * timeout struct is modified by select() on some operating systems, @@ -3288,10 +3288,10 @@ pgstat_write_statsfile(bool permanent) last_statwrite = globalStats.stats_timestamp; /* - * If there is clock skew between backends and the collector, we - * could receive a stats request time that's in the future. If so, - * complain and reset last_statrequest. Resetting ensures that no - * inquiry message can cause more than one stats file write to occur. + * If there is clock skew between backends and the collector, we could + * receive a stats request time that's in the future. If so, complain + * and reset last_statrequest. Resetting ensures that no inquiry + * message can cause more than one stats file write to occur. */ if (last_statrequest > last_statwrite) { diff --git a/src/backend/postmaster/postmaster.c b/src/backend/postmaster/postmaster.c index 0764c32b9b..b367bc9ea1 100644 --- a/src/backend/postmaster/postmaster.c +++ b/src/backend/postmaster/postmaster.c @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/postmaster/postmaster.c,v 1.613 2010/06/24 16:40:45 rhaas Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/postmaster/postmaster.c,v 1.614 2010/07/06 19:18:57 momjian Exp $ * * NOTES * @@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ static bool RecoveryError = false; /* T if WAL recovery failed */ * * When the startup process is ready to start archive recovery, it signals the * postmaster, and we switch to PM_RECOVERY state. The background writer is - * launched, while the startup process continues applying WAL. If Hot Standby + * launched, while the startup process continues applying WAL. If Hot Standby * is enabled, then, after reaching a consistent point in WAL redo, startup * process signals us again, and we switch to PM_HOT_STANDBY state and * begin accepting connections to perform read-only queries. When archive @@ -287,7 +287,7 @@ typedef enum static PMState pmState = PM_INIT; -static bool ReachedNormalRunning = false; /* T if we've reached PM_RUN */ +static bool ReachedNormalRunning = false; /* T if we've reached PM_RUN */ bool ClientAuthInProgress = false; /* T during new-client * authentication */ @@ -385,7 +385,7 @@ typedef struct HANDLE waitHandle; HANDLE procHandle; DWORD procId; -} win32_deadchild_waitinfo; +} win32_deadchild_waitinfo; HANDLE PostmasterHandle; #endif @@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ typedef struct SOCKET origsocket; /* Original socket value, or PGINVALID_SOCKET * if not a socket */ WSAPROTOCOL_INFO wsainfo; -} InheritableSocket; +} InheritableSocket; #else typedef int InheritableSocket; #endif @@ -447,15 +447,15 @@ typedef struct char my_exec_path[MAXPGPATH]; char pkglib_path[MAXPGPATH]; char ExtraOptions[MAXPGPATH]; -} BackendParameters; +} BackendParameters; static void read_backend_variables(char *id, Port *port); -static void restore_backend_variables(BackendParameters *param, Port *port); +static void restore_backend_variables(BackendParameters * param, Port *port); #ifndef WIN32 -static bool save_backend_variables(BackendParameters *param, Port *port); +static bool save_backend_variables(BackendParameters * param, Port *port); #else -static bool save_backend_variables(BackendParameters *param, Port *port, +static bool save_backend_variables(BackendParameters * param, Port *port, HANDLE childProcess, pid_t childPid); #endif @@ -1522,7 +1522,7 @@ initMasks(fd_set *rmask) if (fd == PGINVALID_SOCKET) break; - FD_SET (fd, rmask); + FD_SET(fd, rmask); if (fd > maxsock) maxsock = fd; @@ -2180,6 +2180,7 @@ pmdie(SIGNAL_ARGS) /* and the walwriter too */ if (WalWriterPID != 0) signal_child(WalWriterPID, SIGTERM); + /* * If we're in recovery, we can't kill the startup process * right away, because at present doing so does not release @@ -3033,8 +3034,8 @@ PostmasterStateMachine(void) * Terminate backup mode to avoid recovery after a clean fast * shutdown. Since a backup can only be taken during normal * running (and not, for example, while running under Hot Standby) - * it only makes sense to do this if we reached normal running. - * If we're still in recovery, the backup file is one we're + * it only makes sense to do this if we reached normal running. If + * we're still in recovery, the backup file is one we're * recovering *from*, and we must keep it around so that recovery * restarts from the right place. */ @@ -3390,13 +3391,13 @@ BackendInitialize(Port *port) { if (remote_port[0]) ereport(LOG, - (errmsg("connection received: host=%s port=%s", - remote_host, - remote_port))); + (errmsg("connection received: host=%s port=%s", + remote_host, + remote_port))); else ereport(LOG, - (errmsg("connection received: host=%s", - remote_host))); + (errmsg("connection received: host=%s", + remote_host))); } /* @@ -4601,19 +4602,19 @@ extern pgsocket pgStatSock; #define read_inheritable_socket(dest, src) (*(dest) = *(src)) #else static bool write_duplicated_handle(HANDLE *dest, HANDLE src, HANDLE child); -static bool write_inheritable_socket(InheritableSocket *dest, SOCKET src, +static bool write_inheritable_socket(InheritableSocket * dest, SOCKET src, pid_t childPid); -static void read_inheritable_socket(SOCKET *dest, InheritableSocket *src); +static void read_inheritable_socket(SOCKET * dest, InheritableSocket * src); #endif /* Save critical backend variables into the BackendParameters struct */ #ifndef WIN32 static bool -save_backend_variables(BackendParameters *param, Port *port) +save_backend_variables(BackendParameters * param, Port *port) #else static bool -save_backend_variables(BackendParameters *param, Port *port, +save_backend_variables(BackendParameters * param, Port *port, HANDLE childProcess, pid_t childPid) #endif { @@ -4705,7 +4706,7 @@ write_duplicated_handle(HANDLE *dest, HANDLE src, HANDLE childProcess) * straight socket inheritance. */ static bool -write_inheritable_socket(InheritableSocket *dest, SOCKET src, pid_t childpid) +write_inheritable_socket(InheritableSocket * dest, SOCKET src, pid_t childpid) { dest->origsocket = src; if (src != 0 && src != PGINVALID_SOCKET) @@ -4726,7 +4727,7 @@ write_inheritable_socket(InheritableSocket *dest, SOCKET src, pid_t childpid) * Read a duplicate socket structure back, and get the socket descriptor. */ static void -read_inheritable_socket(SOCKET *dest, InheritableSocket *src) +read_inheritable_socket(SOCKET * dest, InheritableSocket * src) { SOCKET s; @@ -4831,7 +4832,7 @@ read_backend_variables(char *id, Port *port) /* Restore critical backend variables from the BackendParameters struct */ static void -restore_backend_variables(BackendParameters *param, Port *port) +restore_backend_variables(BackendParameters * param, Port *port) { memcpy(port, ¶m->port, sizeof(Port)); read_inheritable_socket(&port->sock, ¶m->portsocket); diff --git a/src/backend/postmaster/syslogger.c b/src/backend/postmaster/syslogger.c index be67c9e5a2..067f7efc64 100644 --- a/src/backend/postmaster/syslogger.c +++ b/src/backend/postmaster/syslogger.c @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/postmaster/syslogger.c,v 1.57 2010/04/16 09:51:49 heikki Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/postmaster/syslogger.c,v 1.58 2010/07/06 19:18:57 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -372,7 +372,7 @@ SysLoggerMain(int argc, char *argv[]) * Wait for some data, timing out after 1 second */ FD_ZERO(&rfds); - FD_SET (syslogPipe[0], &rfds); + FD_SET(syslogPipe[0], &rfds); timeout.tv_sec = 1; timeout.tv_usec = 0; @@ -425,9 +425,9 @@ SysLoggerMain(int argc, char *argv[]) * detect pipe EOF. The main thread just wakes up once a second to * check for SIGHUP and rotation conditions. * - * Server code isn't generally thread-safe, so we ensure that only - * one of the threads is active at a time by entering the critical - * section whenever we're not sleeping. + * Server code isn't generally thread-safe, so we ensure that only one + * of the threads is active at a time by entering the critical section + * whenever we're not sleeping. */ LeaveCriticalSection(&sysloggerSection); diff --git a/src/backend/replication/libpqwalreceiver/libpqwalreceiver.c b/src/backend/replication/libpqwalreceiver/libpqwalreceiver.c index b62f48be82..e7581160cc 100644 --- a/src/backend/replication/libpqwalreceiver/libpqwalreceiver.c +++ b/src/backend/replication/libpqwalreceiver/libpqwalreceiver.c @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/replication/libpqwalreceiver/libpqwalreceiver.c,v 1.11 2010/06/11 10:13:09 heikki Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/replication/libpqwalreceiver/libpqwalreceiver.c,v 1.12 2010/07/06 19:18:57 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -86,9 +86,9 @@ libpqrcv_connect(char *conninfo, XLogRecPtr startpoint) char cmd[64]; /* - * Connect using deliberately undocumented parameter: replication. - * The database name is ignored by the server in replication mode, but - * specify "replication" for .pgpass lookup. + * Connect using deliberately undocumented parameter: replication. The + * database name is ignored by the server in replication mode, but specify + * "replication" for .pgpass lookup. */ snprintf(conninfo_repl, sizeof(conninfo_repl), "%s dbname=replication replication=true", @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ libpqrcv_connect(char *conninfo, XLogRecPtr startpoint) justconnected = true; ereport(LOG, - (errmsg("streaming replication successfully connected to primary"))); + (errmsg("streaming replication successfully connected to primary"))); return true; } @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ libpq_select(int timeout_ms) struct timeval *ptr_timeout; FD_ZERO(&input_mask); - FD_SET (PQsocket(streamConn), &input_mask); + FD_SET(PQsocket(streamConn), &input_mask); if (timeout_ms < 0) ptr_timeout = NULL; @@ -253,19 +253,18 @@ libpq_select(int timeout_ms) static PGresult * libpqrcv_PQexec(const char *query) { - PGresult *result = NULL; - PGresult *lastResult = NULL; + PGresult *result = NULL; + PGresult *lastResult = NULL; /* - * PQexec() silently discards any prior query results on the - * connection. This is not required for walreceiver since it's - * expected that walsender won't generate any such junk results. + * PQexec() silently discards any prior query results on the connection. + * This is not required for walreceiver since it's expected that walsender + * won't generate any such junk results. */ /* - * Submit a query. Since we don't use non-blocking mode, this also - * can block. But its risk is relatively small, so we ignore that - * for now. + * Submit a query. Since we don't use non-blocking mode, this also can + * block. But its risk is relatively small, so we ignore that for now. */ if (!PQsendQuery(streamConn, query)) return NULL; @@ -273,16 +272,16 @@ libpqrcv_PQexec(const char *query) for (;;) { /* - * Receive data until PQgetResult is ready to get the result - * without blocking. + * Receive data until PQgetResult is ready to get the result without + * blocking. */ while (PQisBusy(streamConn)) { /* * We don't need to break down the sleep into smaller increments, * and check for interrupts after each nap, since we can just - * elog(FATAL) within SIGTERM signal handler if the signal - * arrives in the middle of establishment of replication connection. + * elog(FATAL) within SIGTERM signal handler if the signal arrives + * in the middle of establishment of replication connection. */ if (!libpq_select(-1)) continue; /* interrupted */ @@ -291,10 +290,9 @@ libpqrcv_PQexec(const char *query) } /* - * Emulate the PQexec()'s behavior of returning the last result - * when there are many. - * Since walsender will never generate multiple results, we skip - * the concatenation of error messages. + * Emulate the PQexec()'s behavior of returning the last result when + * there are many. Since walsender will never generate multiple + * results, we skip the concatenation of error messages. */ result = PQgetResult(streamConn); if (result == NULL) diff --git a/src/backend/replication/walreceiver.c b/src/backend/replication/walreceiver.c index 153b7ff0e5..06646ead94 100644 --- a/src/backend/replication/walreceiver.c +++ b/src/backend/replication/walreceiver.c @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/replication/walreceiver.c,v 1.15 2010/07/03 20:43:57 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/replication/walreceiver.c,v 1.16 2010/07/06 19:18:57 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -159,6 +159,7 @@ WalReceiverMain(void) { char conninfo[MAXCONNINFO]; XLogRecPtr startpoint; + /* use volatile pointer to prevent code rearrangement */ volatile WalRcvData *walrcv = WalRcv; diff --git a/src/backend/replication/walreceiverfuncs.c b/src/backend/replication/walreceiverfuncs.c index 4bc3bd875c..2ccaedb41c 100644 --- a/src/backend/replication/walreceiverfuncs.c +++ b/src/backend/replication/walreceiverfuncs.c @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/replication/walreceiverfuncs.c,v 1.6 2010/07/03 20:43:57 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/replication/walreceiverfuncs.c,v 1.7 2010/07/06 19:18:57 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ RequestXLogStreaming(XLogRecPtr recptr, const char *conninfo) * Returns the last+1 byte position that walreceiver has written. * * Optionally, returns the previous chunk start, that is the first byte - * written in the most recent walreceiver flush cycle. Callers not + * written in the most recent walreceiver flush cycle. Callers not * interested in that value may pass NULL for latestChunkStart. */ XLogRecPtr diff --git a/src/backend/replication/walsender.c b/src/backend/replication/walsender.c index 298737c89c..2a16888b0f 100644 --- a/src/backend/replication/walsender.c +++ b/src/backend/replication/walsender.c @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 2010-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/replication/walsender.c,v 1.27 2010/06/17 16:41:25 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/replication/walsender.c,v 1.28 2010/07/06 19:18:57 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -66,7 +66,8 @@ bool am_walsender = false; /* Am I a walsender process ? */ int max_wal_senders = 0; /* the maximum number of concurrent walsenders */ int WalSndDelay = 200; /* max sleep time between some actions */ -#define NAPTIME_PER_CYCLE 100000L /* max sleep time between cycles (100ms) */ +#define NAPTIME_PER_CYCLE 100000L /* max sleep time between cycles + * (100ms) */ /* * These variables are used similarly to openLogFile/Id/Seg/Off, @@ -266,10 +267,10 @@ WalSndHandshake(void) * NOTE: This only checks the current value of * wal_level. Even if the current setting is not * 'minimal', there can be old WAL in the pg_xlog - * directory that was created with 'minimal'. - * So this is not bulletproof, the purpose is - * just to give a user-friendly error message that - * hints how to configure the system correctly. + * directory that was created with 'minimal'. So this + * is not bulletproof, the purpose is just to give a + * user-friendly error message that hints how to + * configure the system correctly. */ if (wal_level == WAL_LEVEL_MINIMAL) ereport(FATAL, @@ -378,7 +379,7 @@ WalSndLoop(void) /* Loop forever, unless we get an error */ for (;;) { - long remain; /* remaining time (us) */ + long remain; /* remaining time (us) */ /* * Emergency bailout if postmaster has died. This is to avoid the @@ -422,8 +423,8 @@ WalSndLoop(void) * * On some platforms, signals won't interrupt the sleep. To ensure we * respond reasonably promptly when someone signals us, break down the - * sleep into NAPTIME_PER_CYCLE increments, and check for - * interrupts after each nap. + * sleep into NAPTIME_PER_CYCLE increments, and check for interrupts + * after each nap. */ if (caughtup) { @@ -503,8 +504,8 @@ InitWalSnd(void) ereport(FATAL, (errcode(ERRCODE_TOO_MANY_CONNECTIONS), errmsg("number of requested standby connections " - "exceeds max_wal_senders (currently %d)", - max_wal_senders))); + "exceeds max_wal_senders (currently %d)", + max_wal_senders))); /* Arrange to clean up at walsender exit */ on_shmem_exit(WalSndKill, 0); @@ -563,13 +564,14 @@ XLogRead(char *buf, XLogRecPtr recptr, Size nbytes) if (sendFile < 0) { /* - * If the file is not found, assume it's because the - * standby asked for a too old WAL segment that has already - * been removed or recycled. + * If the file is not found, assume it's because the standby + * asked for a too old WAL segment that has already been + * removed or recycled. */ if (errno == ENOENT) { - char filename[MAXFNAMELEN]; + char filename[MAXFNAMELEN]; + XLogFileName(filename, ThisTimeLineID, sendId, sendSeg); ereport(ERROR, (errcode_for_file_access(), @@ -619,10 +621,10 @@ XLogRead(char *buf, XLogRecPtr recptr, Size nbytes) } /* - * After reading into the buffer, check that what we read was valid. - * We do this after reading, because even though the segment was present - * when we opened it, it might get recycled or removed while we read it. - * The read() succeeds in that case, but the data we tried to read might + * After reading into the buffer, check that what we read was valid. We do + * this after reading, because even though the segment was present when we + * opened it, it might get recycled or removed while we read it. The + * read() succeeds in that case, but the data we tried to read might * already have been overwritten with new WAL records. */ XLogGetLastRemoved(&lastRemovedLog, &lastRemovedSeg); @@ -630,7 +632,8 @@ XLogRead(char *buf, XLogRecPtr recptr, Size nbytes) if (log < lastRemovedLog || (log == lastRemovedLog && seg <= lastRemovedSeg)) { - char filename[MAXFNAMELEN]; + char filename[MAXFNAMELEN]; + XLogFileName(filename, ThisTimeLineID, log, seg); ereport(ERROR, (errcode_for_file_access(), @@ -662,8 +665,8 @@ XLogSend(char *msgbuf, bool *caughtup) WalDataMessageHeader msghdr; /* - * Attempt to send all data that's already been written out and fsync'd - * to disk. We cannot go further than what's been written out given the + * Attempt to send all data that's already been written out and fsync'd to + * disk. We cannot go further than what's been written out given the * current implementation of XLogRead(). And in any case it's unsafe to * send WAL that is not securely down to disk on the master: if the master * subsequently crashes and restarts, slaves must not have applied any WAL @@ -683,19 +686,18 @@ XLogSend(char *msgbuf, bool *caughtup) * MAX_SEND_SIZE bytes to send, send everything. Otherwise send * MAX_SEND_SIZE bytes, but round back to logfile or page boundary. * - * The rounding is not only for performance reasons. Walreceiver - * relies on the fact that we never split a WAL record across two - * messages. Since a long WAL record is split at page boundary into - * continuation records, page boundary is always a safe cut-off point. - * We also assume that SendRqstPtr never points to the middle of a WAL - * record. + * The rounding is not only for performance reasons. Walreceiver relies on + * the fact that we never split a WAL record across two messages. Since a + * long WAL record is split at page boundary into continuation records, + * page boundary is always a safe cut-off point. We also assume that + * SendRqstPtr never points to the middle of a WAL record. */ startptr = sentPtr; if (startptr.xrecoff >= XLogFileSize) { /* - * crossing a logid boundary, skip the non-existent last log - * segment in previous logical log file. + * crossing a logid boundary, skip the non-existent last log segment + * in previous logical log file. */ startptr.xlogid += 1; startptr.xrecoff = 0; @@ -739,8 +741,8 @@ XLogSend(char *msgbuf, bool *caughtup) XLogRead(msgbuf + 1 + sizeof(WalDataMessageHeader), startptr, nbytes); /* - * We fill the message header last so that the send timestamp is taken - * as late as possible. + * We fill the message header last so that the send timestamp is taken as + * late as possible. */ msghdr.dataStart = startptr; msghdr.walEnd = SendRqstPtr; @@ -931,4 +933,5 @@ GetOldestWALSendPointer(void) } return oldest; } + #endif diff --git a/src/backend/storage/file/copydir.c b/src/backend/storage/file/copydir.c index 6bcbb21721..fe44180c93 100644 --- a/src/backend/storage/file/copydir.c +++ b/src/backend/storage/file/copydir.c @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * as a service. * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/file/copydir.c,v 1.1 2010/07/02 17:03:30 rhaas Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/file/copydir.c,v 1.2 2010/07/06 19:18:57 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -70,8 +70,8 @@ copydir(char *fromdir, char *todir, bool recurse) { struct stat fst; - /* If we got a cancel signal during the copy of the directory, quit */ - CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS(); + /* If we got a cancel signal during the copy of the directory, quit */ + CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS(); if (strcmp(xlde->d_name, ".") == 0 || strcmp(xlde->d_name, "..") == 0) @@ -176,8 +176,8 @@ copy_file(char *fromfile, char *tofile) */ for (offset = 0;; offset += nbytes) { - /* If we got a cancel signal during the copy of the file, quit */ - CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS(); + /* If we got a cancel signal during the copy of the file, quit */ + CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPTS(); nbytes = read(srcfd, buffer, COPY_BUF_SIZE); if (nbytes < 0) @@ -226,12 +226,12 @@ static void fsync_fname(char *fname, bool isdir) { int fd; - int returncode; + int returncode; /* - * Some OSs require directories to be opened read-only whereas - * other systems don't allow us to fsync files opened read-only; so - * we need both cases here + * Some OSs require directories to be opened read-only whereas other + * systems don't allow us to fsync files opened read-only; so we need both + * cases here */ if (!isdir) fd = BasicOpenFile(fname, @@ -243,8 +243,8 @@ fsync_fname(char *fname, bool isdir) S_IRUSR | S_IWUSR); /* - * Some OSs don't allow us to open directories at all - * (Windows returns EACCES) + * Some OSs don't allow us to open directories at all (Windows returns + * EACCES) */ if (fd < 0 && isdir && (errno == EISDIR || errno == EACCES)) return; @@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ fsync_fname(char *fname, bool isdir) errmsg("could not open file \"%s\": %m", fname))); returncode = pg_fsync(fd); - + /* Some OSs don't allow us to fsync directories at all */ if (returncode != 0 && isdir && errno == EBADF) { diff --git a/src/backend/storage/ipc/ipc.c b/src/backend/storage/ipc/ipc.c index da6dc08306..e28127b03f 100644 --- a/src/backend/storage/ipc/ipc.c +++ b/src/backend/storage/ipc/ipc.c @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/ipc/ipc.c,v 1.107 2010/03/20 00:58:09 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/ipc/ipc.c,v 1.108 2010/07/06 19:18:57 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -165,13 +165,13 @@ proc_exit_prepare(int code) CritSectionCount = 0; /* - * Also clear the error context stack, to prevent error callbacks - * from being invoked by any elog/ereport calls made during proc_exit. - * Whatever context they might want to offer is probably not relevant, - * and in any case they are likely to fail outright after we've done - * things like aborting any open transaction. (In normal exit scenarios - * the context stack should be empty anyway, but it might not be in the - * case of elog(FATAL) for example.) + * Also clear the error context stack, to prevent error callbacks from + * being invoked by any elog/ereport calls made during proc_exit. Whatever + * context they might want to offer is probably not relevant, and in any + * case they are likely to fail outright after we've done things like + * aborting any open transaction. (In normal exit scenarios the context + * stack should be empty anyway, but it might not be in the case of + * elog(FATAL) for example.) */ error_context_stack = NULL; /* For the same reason, reset debug_query_string before it's clobbered */ diff --git a/src/backend/storage/ipc/procarray.c b/src/backend/storage/ipc/procarray.c index 9163bc68c4..9a1b148cd1 100644 --- a/src/backend/storage/ipc/procarray.c +++ b/src/backend/storage/ipc/procarray.c @@ -19,11 +19,11 @@ * * During hot standby, we also keep a list of XIDs representing transactions * that are known to be running in the master (or more precisely, were running - * as of the current point in the WAL stream). This list is kept in the + * as of the current point in the WAL stream). This list is kept in the * KnownAssignedXids array, and is updated by watching the sequence of * arriving XIDs. This is necessary because if we leave those XIDs out of * snapshots taken for standby queries, then they will appear to be already - * complete, leading to MVCC failures. Note that in hot standby, the PGPROC + * complete, leading to MVCC failures. Note that in hot standby, the PGPROC * array represents standby processes, which by definition are not running * transactions that have XIDs. * @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/ipc/procarray.c,v 1.71 2010/07/03 21:23:58 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/ipc/procarray.c,v 1.72 2010/07/06 19:18:57 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ typedef struct ProcArrayStruct int numKnownAssignedXids; /* currrent # of valid entries */ int tailKnownAssignedXids; /* index of oldest valid element */ int headKnownAssignedXids; /* index of newest element, + 1 */ - slock_t known_assigned_xids_lck; /* protects head/tail pointers */ + slock_t known_assigned_xids_lck; /* protects head/tail pointers */ /* * Highest subxid that has been removed from KnownAssignedXids array to @@ -145,17 +145,17 @@ static void DisplayXidCache(void); /* Primitives for KnownAssignedXids array handling for standby */ static void KnownAssignedXidsCompress(bool force); static void KnownAssignedXidsAdd(TransactionId from_xid, TransactionId to_xid, - bool exclusive_lock); + bool exclusive_lock); static bool KnownAssignedXidsSearch(TransactionId xid, bool remove); static bool KnownAssignedXidExists(TransactionId xid); static void KnownAssignedXidsRemove(TransactionId xid); static void KnownAssignedXidsRemoveTree(TransactionId xid, int nsubxids, - TransactionId *subxids); + TransactionId *subxids); static void KnownAssignedXidsRemovePreceding(TransactionId xid); -static int KnownAssignedXidsGet(TransactionId *xarray, TransactionId xmax); +static int KnownAssignedXidsGet(TransactionId *xarray, TransactionId xmax); static int KnownAssignedXidsGetAndSetXmin(TransactionId *xarray, - TransactionId *xmin, - TransactionId xmax); + TransactionId *xmin, + TransactionId xmax); static void KnownAssignedXidsDisplay(int trace_level); /* @@ -181,9 +181,9 @@ ProcArrayShmemSize(void) * since we may at times copy the whole of the data structures around. We * refer to this size as TOTAL_MAX_CACHED_SUBXIDS. * - * Ideally we'd only create this structure if we were actually doing - * hot standby in the current run, but we don't know that yet at the - * time shared memory is being set up. + * Ideally we'd only create this structure if we were actually doing hot + * standby in the current run, but we don't know that yet at the time + * shared memory is being set up. */ #define TOTAL_MAX_CACHED_SUBXIDS \ ((PGPROC_MAX_CACHED_SUBXIDS + 1) * PROCARRAY_MAXPROCS) @@ -465,9 +465,9 @@ void ProcArrayApplyRecoveryInfo(RunningTransactions running) { TransactionId *xids; - int nxids; + int nxids; TransactionId nextXid; - int i; + int i; Assert(standbyState >= STANDBY_INITIALIZED); Assert(TransactionIdIsValid(running->nextXid)); @@ -510,8 +510,8 @@ ProcArrayApplyRecoveryInfo(RunningTransactions running) else elog(trace_recovery(DEBUG2), "recovery snapshot waiting for %u oldest active xid on standby is %u", - standbySnapshotPendingXmin, - running->oldestRunningXid); + standbySnapshotPendingXmin, + running->oldestRunningXid); return; } @@ -523,8 +523,8 @@ ProcArrayApplyRecoveryInfo(RunningTransactions running) /* * Remove all xids except xids later than the snapshot. We don't know - * exactly which ones that is until precisely now, so that is why we - * allow xids to be added only to remove most of them again here. + * exactly which ones that is until precisely now, so that is why we allow + * xids to be added only to remove most of them again here. */ ExpireOldKnownAssignedTransactionIds(running->nextXid); StandbyReleaseOldLocks(running->nextXid); @@ -536,41 +536,40 @@ ProcArrayApplyRecoveryInfo(RunningTransactions running) /* * Combine the running xact data with already known xids, if any exist. - * KnownAssignedXids is sorted so we cannot just add new xids, we have - * to combine them first, sort them and then re-add to KnownAssignedXids. + * KnownAssignedXids is sorted so we cannot just add new xids, we have to + * combine them first, sort them and then re-add to KnownAssignedXids. * - * Some of the new xids are top-level xids and some are subtransactions. We - * don't call SubtransSetParent because it doesn't matter yet. If we aren't - * overflowed then all xids will fit in snapshot and so we don't need - * subtrans. If we later overflow, an xid assignment record will add xids - * to subtrans. If RunningXacts is overflowed then we don't have enough - * information to correctly update subtrans anyway. + * Some of the new xids are top-level xids and some are subtransactions. + * We don't call SubtransSetParent because it doesn't matter yet. If we + * aren't overflowed then all xids will fit in snapshot and so we don't + * need subtrans. If we later overflow, an xid assignment record will add + * xids to subtrans. If RunningXacts is overflowed then we don't have + * enough information to correctly update subtrans anyway. */ /* - * Allocate a temporary array so we can combine xids. The total - * of both arrays should never normally exceed TOTAL_MAX_CACHED_SUBXIDS. + * Allocate a temporary array so we can combine xids. The total of both + * arrays should never normally exceed TOTAL_MAX_CACHED_SUBXIDS. */ xids = palloc(sizeof(TransactionId) * TOTAL_MAX_CACHED_SUBXIDS); /* - * Get the remaining KnownAssignedXids. In most cases there won't - * be any at all since this exists only to catch a theoretical - * race condition. + * Get the remaining KnownAssignedXids. In most cases there won't be any + * at all since this exists only to catch a theoretical race condition. */ nxids = KnownAssignedXidsGet(xids, InvalidTransactionId); if (nxids > 0) KnownAssignedXidsDisplay(trace_recovery(DEBUG3)); /* - * Now we have a copy of any KnownAssignedXids we can zero the - * array before we re-insertion of combined snapshot. + * Now we have a copy of any KnownAssignedXids we can zero the array + * before we re-insertion of combined snapshot. */ KnownAssignedXidsRemovePreceding(InvalidTransactionId); /* - * Add to the temp array any xids which have not already completed, - * taking care not to overflow in extreme cases. + * Add to the temp array any xids which have not already completed, taking + * care not to overflow in extreme cases. */ for (i = 0; i < running->xcnt; i++) { @@ -597,7 +596,8 @@ ProcArrayApplyRecoveryInfo(RunningTransactions running) if (nxids > 0) { /* - * Sort the array so that we can add them safely into KnownAssignedXids. + * Sort the array so that we can add them safely into + * KnownAssignedXids. */ qsort(xids, nxids, sizeof(TransactionId), xidComparator); @@ -622,23 +622,21 @@ ProcArrayApplyRecoveryInfo(RunningTransactions running) pfree(xids); /* - * Now we've got the running xids we need to set the global values - * thare used to track snapshots as they evolve further + * Now we've got the running xids we need to set the global values thare + * used to track snapshots as they evolve further * - * * latestCompletedXid which will be the xmax for snapshots - * * lastOverflowedXid which shows whether snapshots overflow - * * nextXid + * * latestCompletedXid which will be the xmax for snapshots * + * lastOverflowedXid which shows whether snapshots overflow * nextXid * * If the snapshot overflowed, then we still initialise with what we know, * but the recovery snapshot isn't fully valid yet because we know there - * are some subxids missing. - * We don't know the specific subxids that are missing, so conservatively - * assume the last one is latestObservedXid. If no missing subxids, - * try to clear lastOverflowedXid. + * are some subxids missing. We don't know the specific subxids that are + * missing, so conservatively assume the last one is latestObservedXid. + * If no missing subxids, try to clear lastOverflowedXid. * * If the snapshot didn't overflow it's still possible that an overflow - * occurred in the gap between taking snapshot and logging record, so - * we also need to check if lastOverflowedXid is already ahead of us. + * occurred in the gap between taking snapshot and logging record, so we + * also need to check if lastOverflowedXid is already ahead of us. */ if (running->subxid_overflow) { @@ -650,7 +648,7 @@ ProcArrayApplyRecoveryInfo(RunningTransactions running) procArray->lastOverflowedXid = latestObservedXid; } else if (TransactionIdFollows(procArray->lastOverflowedXid, - latestObservedXid)) + latestObservedXid)) { standbyState = STANDBY_SNAPSHOT_PENDING; @@ -662,7 +660,7 @@ ProcArrayApplyRecoveryInfo(RunningTransactions running) standbySnapshotPendingXmin = InvalidTransactionId; if (TransactionIdFollows(running->oldestRunningXid, - procArray->lastOverflowedXid)) + procArray->lastOverflowedXid)) procArray->lastOverflowedXid = InvalidTransactionId; } @@ -933,10 +931,10 @@ TransactionIdIsInProgress(TransactionId xid) /* * If the KnownAssignedXids overflowed, we have to check pg_subtrans - * too. Fetch all xids from KnownAssignedXids that are lower than xid, - * since if xid is a subtransaction its parent will always have a - * lower value. Note we will collect both main and subXIDs here, - * but there's no help for it. + * too. Fetch all xids from KnownAssignedXids that are lower than + * xid, since if xid is a subtransaction its parent will always have a + * lower value. Note we will collect both main and subXIDs here, but + * there's no help for it. */ if (TransactionIdPrecedesOrEquals(xid, procArray->lastOverflowedXid)) nxids = KnownAssignedXidsGet(xids, xid); @@ -1117,15 +1115,16 @@ GetOldestXmin(bool allDbs, bool ignoreVacuum) LWLockRelease(ProcArrayLock); /* - * Compute the cutoff XID, being careful not to generate a "permanent" XID. + * Compute the cutoff XID, being careful not to generate a "permanent" + * XID. * * vacuum_defer_cleanup_age provides some additional "slop" for the * benefit of hot standby queries on slave servers. This is quick and * dirty, and perhaps not all that useful unless the master has a - * predictable transaction rate, but it's what we've got. Note that - * we are assuming vacuum_defer_cleanup_age isn't large enough to cause - * wraparound --- so guc.c should limit it to no more than the xidStopLimit - * threshold in varsup.c. + * predictable transaction rate, but it's what we've got. Note that we + * are assuming vacuum_defer_cleanup_age isn't large enough to cause + * wraparound --- so guc.c should limit it to no more than the + * xidStopLimit threshold in varsup.c. */ result -= vacuum_defer_cleanup_age; if (!TransactionIdIsNormal(result)) @@ -1229,8 +1228,8 @@ GetSnapshotData(Snapshot snapshot) /* * If we're in recovery then snapshot data comes from a different place, - * so decide which route we take before grab the lock. It is possible - * for recovery to end before we finish taking snapshot, and for newly + * so decide which route we take before grab the lock. It is possible for + * recovery to end before we finish taking snapshot, and for newly * assigned transaction ids to be added to the procarray. Xmax cannot * change while we hold ProcArrayLock, so those newly added transaction * ids would be filtered away, so we need not be concerned about them. @@ -1240,8 +1239,8 @@ GetSnapshotData(Snapshot snapshot) if (!snapshot->takenDuringRecovery) { /* - * Spin over procArray checking xid, xmin, and subxids. The goal is to - * gather all active xids, find the lowest xmin, and try to record + * Spin over procArray checking xid, xmin, and subxids. The goal is + * to gather all active xids, find the lowest xmin, and try to record * subxids. During recovery no xids will be assigned, so all normal * backends can be ignored, nor are there any VACUUMs running. All * prepared transaction xids are held in KnownAssignedXids, so these @@ -1257,7 +1256,7 @@ GetSnapshotData(Snapshot snapshot) continue; /* Update globalxmin to be the smallest valid xmin */ - xid = proc->xmin; /* fetch just once */ + xid = proc->xmin; /* fetch just once */ if (TransactionIdIsNormal(xid) && TransactionIdPrecedes(xid, globalxmin)) globalxmin = xid; @@ -1266,13 +1265,13 @@ GetSnapshotData(Snapshot snapshot) xid = proc->xid; /* - * If the transaction has been assigned an xid < xmax we add it to the - * snapshot, and update xmin if necessary. There's no need to store - * XIDs >= xmax, since we'll treat them as running anyway. We don't - * bother to examine their subxids either. + * If the transaction has been assigned an xid < xmax we add it to + * the snapshot, and update xmin if necessary. There's no need to + * store XIDs >= xmax, since we'll treat them as running anyway. + * We don't bother to examine their subxids either. * - * We don't include our own XID (if any) in the snapshot, but we must - * include it into xmin. + * We don't include our own XID (if any) in the snapshot, but we + * must include it into xmin. */ if (TransactionIdIsNormal(xid)) { @@ -1285,16 +1284,17 @@ GetSnapshotData(Snapshot snapshot) } /* - * Save subtransaction XIDs if possible (if we've already overflowed, - * there's no point). Note that the subxact XIDs must be later than - * their parent, so no need to check them against xmin. We could - * filter against xmax, but it seems better not to do that much work - * while holding the ProcArrayLock. + * Save subtransaction XIDs if possible (if we've already + * overflowed, there's no point). Note that the subxact XIDs must + * be later than their parent, so no need to check them against + * xmin. We could filter against xmax, but it seems better not to + * do that much work while holding the ProcArrayLock. * * The other backend can add more subxids concurrently, but cannot - * remove any. Hence it's important to fetch nxids just once. Should - * be safe to use memcpy, though. (We needn't worry about missing any - * xids added concurrently, because they must postdate xmax.) + * remove any. Hence it's important to fetch nxids just once. + * Should be safe to use memcpy, though. (We needn't worry about + * missing any xids added concurrently, because they must postdate + * xmax.) * * Again, our own XIDs are not included in the snapshot. */ @@ -1805,7 +1805,7 @@ GetCurrentVirtualXIDs(TransactionId limitXmin, bool excludeXmin0, * us then the conflict assessment made here would never include the snapshot * that is being derived. So we take LW_SHARED on the ProcArray and allow * concurrent snapshots when limitXmin is valid. We might think about adding - * Assert(limitXmin < lowest(KnownAssignedXids)) + * Assert(limitXmin < lowest(KnownAssignedXids)) * but that would not be true in the case of FATAL errors lagging in array, * but we already know those are bogus anyway, so we skip that test. * @@ -2273,7 +2273,7 @@ DisplayXidCache(void) * treated as running by standby transactions, even though they are not in * the standby server's PGPROC array. * - * We record all XIDs that we know have been assigned. That includes all the + * We record all XIDs that we know have been assigned. That includes all the * XIDs seen in WAL records, plus all unobserved XIDs that we can deduce have * been assigned. We can deduce the existence of unobserved XIDs because we * know XIDs are assigned in sequence, with no gaps. The KnownAssignedXids @@ -2282,7 +2282,7 @@ DisplayXidCache(void) * * During hot standby we do not fret too much about the distinction between * top-level XIDs and subtransaction XIDs. We store both together in the - * KnownAssignedXids list. In backends, this is copied into snapshots in + * KnownAssignedXids list. In backends, this is copied into snapshots in * GetSnapshotData(), taking advantage of the fact that XidInMVCCSnapshot() * doesn't care about the distinction either. Subtransaction XIDs are * effectively treated as top-level XIDs and in the typical case pg_subtrans @@ -2338,7 +2338,7 @@ RecordKnownAssignedTransactionIds(TransactionId xid) Assert(TransactionIdIsValid(xid)); elog(trace_recovery(DEBUG4), "record known xact %u latestObservedXid %u", - xid, latestObservedXid); + xid, latestObservedXid); /* * When a newly observed xid arrives, it is frequently the case that it is @@ -2350,9 +2350,9 @@ RecordKnownAssignedTransactionIds(TransactionId xid) TransactionId next_expected_xid; /* - * Extend clog and subtrans like we do in GetNewTransactionId() - * during normal operation using individual extend steps. - * Typical case requires almost no activity. + * Extend clog and subtrans like we do in GetNewTransactionId() during + * normal operation using individual extend steps. Typical case + * requires almost no activity. */ next_expected_xid = latestObservedXid; TransactionIdAdvance(next_expected_xid); @@ -2391,7 +2391,7 @@ RecordKnownAssignedTransactionIds(TransactionId xid) */ void ExpireTreeKnownAssignedTransactionIds(TransactionId xid, int nsubxids, - TransactionId *subxids, TransactionId max_xid) + TransactionId *subxids, TransactionId max_xid) { Assert(standbyState >= STANDBY_INITIALIZED); @@ -2485,14 +2485,14 @@ ExpireOldKnownAssignedTransactionIds(TransactionId xid) * must hold shared ProcArrayLock to examine the array. To remove XIDs from * the array, the startup process must hold ProcArrayLock exclusively, for * the usual transactional reasons (compare commit/abort of a transaction - * during normal running). Compressing unused entries out of the array + * during normal running). Compressing unused entries out of the array * likewise requires exclusive lock. To add XIDs to the array, we just insert * them into slots to the right of the head pointer and then advance the head * pointer. This wouldn't require any lock at all, except that on machines * with weak memory ordering we need to be careful that other processors * see the array element changes before they see the head pointer change. * We handle this by using a spinlock to protect reads and writes of the - * head/tail pointers. (We could dispense with the spinlock if we were to + * head/tail pointers. (We could dispense with the spinlock if we were to * create suitable memory access barrier primitives and use those instead.) * The spinlock must be taken to read or write the head/tail pointers unless * the caller holds ProcArrayLock exclusively. @@ -2534,9 +2534,10 @@ KnownAssignedXidsCompress(bool force) { /* use volatile pointer to prevent code rearrangement */ volatile ProcArrayStruct *pArray = procArray; - int head, tail; - int compress_index; - int i; + int head, + tail; + int compress_index; + int i; /* no spinlock required since we hold ProcArrayLock exclusively */ head = pArray->headKnownAssignedXids; @@ -2545,16 +2546,16 @@ KnownAssignedXidsCompress(bool force) if (!force) { /* - * If we can choose how much to compress, use a heuristic to - * avoid compressing too often or not often enough. + * If we can choose how much to compress, use a heuristic to avoid + * compressing too often or not often enough. * - * Heuristic is if we have a large enough current spread and - * less than 50% of the elements are currently in use, then - * compress. This should ensure we compress fairly infrequently. - * We could compress less often though the virtual array would - * spread out more and snapshots would become more expensive. + * Heuristic is if we have a large enough current spread and less than + * 50% of the elements are currently in use, then compress. This + * should ensure we compress fairly infrequently. We could compress + * less often though the virtual array would spread out more and + * snapshots would become more expensive. */ - int nelements = head - tail; + int nelements = head - tail; if (nelements < 4 * PROCARRAY_MAXPROCS || nelements < 2 * pArray->numKnownAssignedXids) @@ -2562,8 +2563,8 @@ KnownAssignedXidsCompress(bool force) } /* - * We compress the array by reading the valid values from tail - * to head, re-aligning data to 0th element. + * We compress the array by reading the valid values from tail to head, + * re-aligning data to 0th element. */ compress_index = 0; for (i = tail; i < head; i++) @@ -2588,7 +2589,7 @@ KnownAssignedXidsCompress(bool force) * If exclusive_lock is true then caller already holds ProcArrayLock in * exclusive mode, so we need no extra locking here. Else caller holds no * lock, so we need to be sure we maintain sufficient interlocks against - * concurrent readers. (Only the startup process ever calls this, so no need + * concurrent readers. (Only the startup process ever calls this, so no need * to worry about concurrent writers.) */ static void @@ -2597,17 +2598,18 @@ KnownAssignedXidsAdd(TransactionId from_xid, TransactionId to_xid, { /* use volatile pointer to prevent code rearrangement */ volatile ProcArrayStruct *pArray = procArray; - TransactionId next_xid; - int head, tail; + TransactionId next_xid; + int head, + tail; int nxids; int i; Assert(TransactionIdPrecedesOrEquals(from_xid, to_xid)); /* - * Calculate how many array slots we'll need. Normally this is cheap; - * in the unusual case where the XIDs cross the wrap point, we do it the - * hard way. + * Calculate how many array slots we'll need. Normally this is cheap; in + * the unusual case where the XIDs cross the wrap point, we do it the hard + * way. */ if (to_xid >= from_xid) nxids = to_xid - from_xid + 1; @@ -2623,8 +2625,8 @@ KnownAssignedXidsAdd(TransactionId from_xid, TransactionId to_xid, } /* - * Since only the startup process modifies the head/tail pointers, - * we don't need a lock to read them here. + * Since only the startup process modifies the head/tail pointers, we + * don't need a lock to read them here. */ head = pArray->headKnownAssignedXids; tail = pArray->tailKnownAssignedXids; @@ -2633,9 +2635,9 @@ KnownAssignedXidsAdd(TransactionId from_xid, TransactionId to_xid, Assert(tail >= 0 && tail < pArray->maxKnownAssignedXids); /* - * Verify that insertions occur in TransactionId sequence. Note that - * even if the last existing element is marked invalid, it must still - * have a correctly sequenced XID value. + * Verify that insertions occur in TransactionId sequence. Note that even + * if the last existing element is marked invalid, it must still have a + * correctly sequenced XID value. */ if (head > tail && TransactionIdFollowsOrEquals(KnownAssignedXids[head - 1], from_xid)) @@ -2687,8 +2689,8 @@ KnownAssignedXidsAdd(TransactionId from_xid, TransactionId to_xid, * ensure that other processors see the above array updates before they * see the head pointer change. * - * If we're holding ProcArrayLock exclusively, there's no need to take - * the spinlock. + * If we're holding ProcArrayLock exclusively, there's no need to take the + * spinlock. */ if (exclusive_lock) pArray->headKnownAssignedXids = head; @@ -2714,10 +2716,11 @@ KnownAssignedXidsSearch(TransactionId xid, bool remove) { /* use volatile pointer to prevent code rearrangement */ volatile ProcArrayStruct *pArray = procArray; - int first, last; - int head; - int tail; - int result_index = -1; + int first, + last; + int head; + int tail; + int result_index = -1; if (remove) { @@ -2735,15 +2738,15 @@ KnownAssignedXidsSearch(TransactionId xid, bool remove) } /* - * Standard binary search. Note we can ignore the KnownAssignedXidsValid + * Standard binary search. Note we can ignore the KnownAssignedXidsValid * array here, since even invalid entries will contain sorted XIDs. */ first = tail; last = head - 1; while (first <= last) { - int mid_index; - TransactionId mid_xid; + int mid_index; + TransactionId mid_xid; mid_index = (first + last) / 2; mid_xid = KnownAssignedXids[mid_index]; @@ -2825,12 +2828,12 @@ KnownAssignedXidsRemove(TransactionId xid) /* * Note: we cannot consider it an error to remove an XID that's not * present. We intentionally remove subxact IDs while processing - * XLOG_XACT_ASSIGNMENT, to avoid array overflow. Then those XIDs - * will be removed again when the top-level xact commits or aborts. + * XLOG_XACT_ASSIGNMENT, to avoid array overflow. Then those XIDs will be + * removed again when the top-level xact commits or aborts. * - * It might be possible to track such XIDs to distinguish this case - * from actual errors, but it would be complicated and probably not - * worth it. So, just ignore the search result. + * It might be possible to track such XIDs to distinguish this case from + * actual errors, but it would be complicated and probably not worth it. + * So, just ignore the search result. */ (void) KnownAssignedXidsSearch(xid, true); } @@ -2845,7 +2848,7 @@ static void KnownAssignedXidsRemoveTree(TransactionId xid, int nsubxids, TransactionId *subxids) { - int i; + int i; if (TransactionIdIsValid(xid)) KnownAssignedXidsRemove(xid); @@ -2868,8 +2871,10 @@ KnownAssignedXidsRemovePreceding(TransactionId removeXid) { /* use volatile pointer to prevent code rearrangement */ volatile ProcArrayStruct *pArray = procArray; - int count = 0; - int head, tail, i; + int count = 0; + int head, + tail, + i; if (!TransactionIdIsValid(removeXid)) { @@ -2882,8 +2887,8 @@ KnownAssignedXidsRemovePreceding(TransactionId removeXid) elog(trace_recovery(DEBUG4), "prune KnownAssignedXids to %u", removeXid); /* - * Mark entries invalid starting at the tail. Since array is sorted, - * we can stop as soon as we reach a entry >= removeXid. + * Mark entries invalid starting at the tail. Since array is sorted, we + * can stop as soon as we reach a entry >= removeXid. */ tail = pArray->tailKnownAssignedXids; head = pArray->headKnownAssignedXids; @@ -2892,7 +2897,7 @@ KnownAssignedXidsRemovePreceding(TransactionId removeXid) { if (KnownAssignedXidsValid[i]) { - TransactionId knownXid = KnownAssignedXids[i]; + TransactionId knownXid = KnownAssignedXids[i]; if (TransactionIdFollowsOrEquals(knownXid, removeXid)) break; @@ -2961,15 +2966,16 @@ KnownAssignedXidsGetAndSetXmin(TransactionId *xarray, TransactionId *xmin, /* use volatile pointer to prevent code rearrangement */ volatile ProcArrayStruct *pArray = procArray; int count = 0; - int head, tail; + int head, + tail; int i; /* - * Fetch head just once, since it may change while we loop. - * We can stop once we reach the initially seen head, since - * we are certain that an xid cannot enter and then leave the - * array while we hold ProcArrayLock. We might miss newly-added - * xids, but they should be >= xmax so irrelevant anyway. + * Fetch head just once, since it may change while we loop. We can stop + * once we reach the initially seen head, since we are certain that an xid + * cannot enter and then leave the array while we hold ProcArrayLock. We + * might miss newly-added xids, but they should be >= xmax so irrelevant + * anyway. * * Must take spinlock to ensure we see up-to-date array contents. */ @@ -3024,9 +3030,11 @@ KnownAssignedXidsDisplay(int trace_level) { /* use volatile pointer to prevent code rearrangement */ volatile ProcArrayStruct *pArray = procArray; - StringInfoData buf; - int head, tail, i; - int nxids = 0; + StringInfoData buf; + int head, + tail, + i; + int nxids = 0; tail = pArray->tailKnownAssignedXids; head = pArray->headKnownAssignedXids; diff --git a/src/backend/storage/ipc/shmem.c b/src/backend/storage/ipc/shmem.c index 5e6f955022..910af52737 100644 --- a/src/backend/storage/ipc/shmem.c +++ b/src/backend/storage/ipc/shmem.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/ipc/shmem.c,v 1.104 2010/04/28 16:54:16 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/ipc/shmem.c,v 1.105 2010/07/06 19:18:57 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ ShmemInitHash(const char *name, /* table string name for shmem index */ * already in the shmem index (hence, already initialized). * * Note: before Postgres 9.0, this function returned NULL for some failure - * cases. Now, it always throws error instead, so callers need not check + * cases. Now, it always throws error instead, so callers need not check * for NULL. */ void * @@ -362,8 +362,8 @@ ShmemInitStruct(const char *name, Size size, bool *foundPtr) LWLockRelease(ShmemIndexLock); ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_OUT_OF_MEMORY), - errmsg("could not create ShmemIndex entry for data structure \"%s\"", - name))); + errmsg("could not create ShmemIndex entry for data structure \"%s\"", + name))); } if (*foundPtr) @@ -377,11 +377,11 @@ ShmemInitStruct(const char *name, Size size, bool *foundPtr) { LWLockRelease(ShmemIndexLock); ereport(ERROR, - (errmsg("ShmemIndex entry size is wrong for data structure" - " \"%s\": expected %lu, actual %lu", - name, - (unsigned long) size, - (unsigned long) result->size))); + (errmsg("ShmemIndex entry size is wrong for data structure" + " \"%s\": expected %lu, actual %lu", + name, + (unsigned long) size, + (unsigned long) result->size))); } structPtr = result->location; } diff --git a/src/backend/storage/ipc/standby.c b/src/backend/storage/ipc/standby.c index 8525492bc2..d007f71041 100644 --- a/src/backend/storage/ipc/standby.c +++ b/src/backend/storage/ipc/standby.c @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/ipc/standby.c,v 1.26 2010/07/03 20:43:58 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/ipc/standby.c,v 1.27 2010/07/06 19:18:57 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -125,12 +125,12 @@ ShutdownRecoveryTransactionEnvironment(void) static TimestampTz GetStandbyLimitTime(void) { - TimestampTz rtime; + TimestampTz rtime; bool fromStream; /* * The cutoff time is the last WAL data receipt time plus the appropriate - * delay variable. Delay of -1 means wait forever. + * delay variable. Delay of -1 means wait forever. */ GetXLogReceiptTime(&rtime, &fromStream); if (fromStream) @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ static int standbyWait_us = STANDBY_INITIAL_WAIT_US; static bool WaitExceedsMaxStandbyDelay(void) { - TimestampTz ltime; + TimestampTz ltime; /* Are we past the limit time? */ ltime = GetStandbyLimitTime(); @@ -171,8 +171,8 @@ WaitExceedsMaxStandbyDelay(void) pg_usleep(standbyWait_us); /* - * Progressively increase the sleep times, but not to more than 1s, - * since pg_usleep isn't interruptable on some platforms. + * Progressively increase the sleep times, but not to more than 1s, since + * pg_usleep isn't interruptable on some platforms. */ standbyWait_us *= 2; if (standbyWait_us > 1000000) @@ -411,8 +411,8 @@ void ResolveRecoveryConflictWithBufferPin(void) { bool sig_alarm_enabled = false; - TimestampTz ltime; - TimestampTz now; + TimestampTz ltime; + TimestampTz now; Assert(InHotStandby); @@ -814,10 +814,10 @@ standby_desc(StringInfo buf, uint8 xl_info, char *rec) * up from a checkpoint and are immediately at our starting point, we * unconditionally move to STANDBY_INITIALIZED. After this point we * must do 4 things: - * * move shared nextXid forwards as we see new xids - * * extend the clog and subtrans with each new xid - * * keep track of uncommitted known assigned xids - * * keep track of uncommitted AccessExclusiveLocks + * * move shared nextXid forwards as we see new xids + * * extend the clog and subtrans with each new xid + * * keep track of uncommitted known assigned xids + * * keep track of uncommitted AccessExclusiveLocks * * When we see a commit/abort we must remove known assigned xids and locks * from the completing transaction. Attempted removals that cannot locate @@ -841,11 +841,11 @@ LogStandbySnapshot(TransactionId *oldestActiveXid, TransactionId *nextXid) /* * Get details of any AccessExclusiveLocks being held at the moment. * - * XXX GetRunningTransactionLocks() currently holds a lock on all partitions - * though it is possible to further optimise the locking. By reference - * counting locks and storing the value on the ProcArray entry for each backend - * we can easily tell if any locks need recording without trying to acquire - * the partition locks and scanning the lock table. + * XXX GetRunningTransactionLocks() currently holds a lock on all + * partitions though it is possible to further optimise the locking. By + * reference counting locks and storing the value on the ProcArray entry + * for each backend we can easily tell if any locks need recording without + * trying to acquire the partition locks and scanning the lock table. */ locks = GetRunningTransactionLocks(&nlocks); if (nlocks > 0) @@ -856,10 +856,12 @@ LogStandbySnapshot(TransactionId *oldestActiveXid, TransactionId *nextXid) * record we write, because standby will open up when it sees this. */ running = GetRunningTransactionData(); + /* - * The gap between GetRunningTransactionData() and LogCurrentRunningXacts() - * is what most of the fuss is about here, so artifically extending this - * interval is a great way to test the little used parts of the code. + * The gap between GetRunningTransactionData() and + * LogCurrentRunningXacts() is what most of the fuss is about here, so + * artifically extending this interval is a great way to test the little + * used parts of the code. */ LogCurrentRunningXacts(running); @@ -910,20 +912,20 @@ LogCurrentRunningXacts(RunningTransactions CurrRunningXacts) if (CurrRunningXacts->subxid_overflow) elog(trace_recovery(DEBUG2), - "snapshot of %u running transactions overflowed (lsn %X/%X oldest xid %u latest complete %u next xid %u)", - CurrRunningXacts->xcnt, - recptr.xlogid, recptr.xrecoff, - CurrRunningXacts->oldestRunningXid, - CurrRunningXacts->latestCompletedXid, - CurrRunningXacts->nextXid); + "snapshot of %u running transactions overflowed (lsn %X/%X oldest xid %u latest complete %u next xid %u)", + CurrRunningXacts->xcnt, + recptr.xlogid, recptr.xrecoff, + CurrRunningXacts->oldestRunningXid, + CurrRunningXacts->latestCompletedXid, + CurrRunningXacts->nextXid); else elog(trace_recovery(DEBUG2), - "snapshot of %u running transaction ids (lsn %X/%X oldest xid %u latest complete %u next xid %u)", - CurrRunningXacts->xcnt, - recptr.xlogid, recptr.xrecoff, - CurrRunningXacts->oldestRunningXid, - CurrRunningXacts->latestCompletedXid, - CurrRunningXacts->nextXid); + "snapshot of %u running transaction ids (lsn %X/%X oldest xid %u latest complete %u next xid %u)", + CurrRunningXacts->xcnt, + recptr.xlogid, recptr.xrecoff, + CurrRunningXacts->oldestRunningXid, + CurrRunningXacts->latestCompletedXid, + CurrRunningXacts->nextXid); } /* diff --git a/src/backend/storage/lmgr/proc.c b/src/backend/storage/lmgr/proc.c index 2d77be0a34..04d11f73cf 100644 --- a/src/backend/storage/lmgr/proc.c +++ b/src/backend/storage/lmgr/proc.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/lmgr/proc.c,v 1.220 2010/07/03 20:43:58 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/storage/lmgr/proc.c,v 1.221 2010/07/06 19:18:57 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -1664,6 +1664,7 @@ enable_standby_sig_alarm(TimestampTz now, TimestampTz fin_time, bool deadlock_on long secs; int usecs; struct itimerval timeval; + TimestampDifference(now, statement_fin_time, &secs, &usecs); if (secs == 0 && usecs == 0) @@ -1715,15 +1716,15 @@ static bool CheckStandbyTimeout(void) { TimestampTz now; - bool reschedule = false; + bool reschedule = false; standby_timeout_active = false; now = GetCurrentTimestamp(); /* - * Reschedule the timer if its not time to wake yet, or if we - * have both timers set and the first one has just been reached. + * Reschedule the timer if its not time to wake yet, or if we have both + * timers set and the first one has just been reached. */ if (now >= statement_fin_time) { @@ -1731,9 +1732,8 @@ CheckStandbyTimeout(void) { /* * We're still waiting when we reach deadlock timeout, so send out - * a request to have other backends check themselves for - * deadlock. Then continue waiting until statement_fin_time, - * if that's set. + * a request to have other backends check themselves for deadlock. + * Then continue waiting until statement_fin_time, if that's set. */ SendRecoveryConflictWithBufferPin(PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_STARTUP_DEADLOCK); deadlock_timeout_active = false; @@ -1764,6 +1764,7 @@ CheckStandbyTimeout(void) long secs; int usecs; struct itimerval timeval; + TimestampDifference(now, statement_fin_time, &secs, &usecs); if (secs == 0 && usecs == 0) diff --git a/src/backend/tcop/fastpath.c b/src/backend/tcop/fastpath.c index 6d22447873..5870081fe3 100644 --- a/src/backend/tcop/fastpath.c +++ b/src/backend/tcop/fastpath.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/tcop/fastpath.c,v 1.104 2010/06/30 18:10:23 heikki Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/tcop/fastpath.c,v 1.105 2010/07/06 19:18:57 momjian Exp $ * * NOTES * This cruft is the server side of PQfn. @@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ HandleFunctionRequest(StringInfo msgBuf) if ((fid == F_PG_GET_EXPR || fid == F_PG_GET_EXPR_EXT) && !superuser()) ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE), - errmsg("argument to pg_get_expr() must come from system catalogs"))); + errmsg("argument to pg_get_expr() must come from system catalogs"))); /* * Prepare function call info block and insert arguments. diff --git a/src/backend/tcop/postgres.c b/src/backend/tcop/postgres.c index 4a08888561..0176c528e2 100644 --- a/src/backend/tcop/postgres.c +++ b/src/backend/tcop/postgres.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/tcop/postgres.c,v 1.594 2010/05/12 19:45:02 sriggs Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/tcop/postgres.c,v 1.595 2010/07/06 19:18:57 momjian Exp $ * * NOTES * this is the "main" module of the postgres backend and @@ -2840,8 +2840,8 @@ RecoveryConflictInterrupt(ProcSignalReason reason) /* * All conflicts apart from database cause dynamic errors where the * command or transaction can be retried at a later point with some - * potential for success. No need to reset this, since - * non-retryable conflict errors are currently FATAL. + * potential for success. No need to reset this, since non-retryable + * conflict errors are currently FATAL. */ if (reason == PROCSIG_RECOVERY_CONFLICT_DATABASE) RecoveryConflictRetryable = false; diff --git a/src/backend/tsearch/ts_typanalyze.c b/src/backend/tsearch/ts_typanalyze.c index e97e22bc26..e9685082b9 100644 --- a/src/backend/tsearch/ts_typanalyze.c +++ b/src/backend/tsearch/ts_typanalyze.c @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/tsearch/ts_typanalyze.c,v 1.9 2010/05/30 21:59:02 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/tsearch/ts_typanalyze.c,v 1.10 2010/07/06 19:18:57 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -115,13 +115,13 @@ ts_typanalyze(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS) * language's frequency table, where K is the target number of entries in * the MCELEM array plus an arbitrary constant, meant to reflect the fact * that the most common words in any language would usually be stopwords - * so we will not actually see them in the input. We assume that the + * so we will not actually see them in the input. We assume that the * distribution of word frequencies (including the stopwords) follows Zipf's * law with an exponent of 1. * * Assuming Zipfian distribution, the frequency of the K'th word is equal * to 1/(K * H(W)) where H(n) is 1/2 + 1/3 + ... + 1/n and W is the number of - * words in the language. Putting W as one million, we get roughly 0.07/K. + * words in the language. Putting W as one million, we get roughly 0.07/K. * Assuming top 10 words are stopwords gives s = 0.07/(K + 10). We set * epsilon = s/10, which gives bucket width w = (K + 10)/0.007 and * maximum expected hashtable size of about 1000 * (K + 10). @@ -162,10 +162,10 @@ compute_tsvector_stats(VacAttrStats *stats, TrackItem *item; /* - * We want statistics_target * 10 lexemes in the MCELEM array. This + * We want statistics_target * 10 lexemes in the MCELEM array. This * multiplier is pretty arbitrary, but is meant to reflect the fact that - * the number of individual lexeme values tracked in pg_statistic ought - * to be more than the number of values for a simple scalar column. + * the number of individual lexeme values tracked in pg_statistic ought to + * be more than the number of values for a simple scalar column. */ num_mcelem = stats->attr->attstattarget * 10; @@ -300,7 +300,7 @@ compute_tsvector_stats(VacAttrStats *stats, /* * Construct an array of the interesting hashtable items, that is, - * those meeting the cutoff frequency (s - epsilon)*N. Also identify + * those meeting the cutoff frequency (s - epsilon)*N. Also identify * the minimum and maximum frequencies among these items. * * Since epsilon = s/10 and bucket_width = 1/epsilon, the cutoff @@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ compute_tsvector_stats(VacAttrStats *stats, */ cutoff_freq = 9 * lexeme_no / bucket_width; - i = hash_get_num_entries(lexemes_tab); /* surely enough space */ + i = hash_get_num_entries(lexemes_tab); /* surely enough space */ sort_table = (TrackItem **) palloc(sizeof(TrackItem *) * i); hash_seq_init(&scan_status, lexemes_tab); @@ -332,9 +332,9 @@ compute_tsvector_stats(VacAttrStats *stats, num_mcelem, bucket_width, lexeme_no, i, track_len); /* - * If we obtained more lexemes than we really want, get rid of - * those with least frequencies. The easiest way is to qsort the - * array into descending frequency order and truncate the array. + * If we obtained more lexemes than we really want, get rid of those + * with least frequencies. The easiest way is to qsort the array into + * descending frequency order and truncate the array. */ if (num_mcelem < track_len) { @@ -383,8 +383,8 @@ compute_tsvector_stats(VacAttrStats *stats, mcelem_freqs = (float4 *) palloc((num_mcelem + 2) * sizeof(float4)); /* - * See comments above about use of nonnull_cnt as the divisor - * for the final frequency estimates. + * See comments above about use of nonnull_cnt as the divisor for + * the final frequency estimates. */ for (i = 0; i < num_mcelem; i++) { diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/formatting.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/formatting.c index e83a1d9014..08ddab214d 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/formatting.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/formatting.c @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ /* ----------------------------------------------------------------------- * formatting.c * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/formatting.c,v 1.170 2010/04/07 21:41:53 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/formatting.c,v 1.171 2010/07/06 19:18:58 momjian Exp $ * * * Portions Copyright (c) 1999-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group @@ -2658,12 +2658,13 @@ DCH_from_char(FormatNode *node, char *in, TmFromChar *out) s += SKIP_THth(n->suffix); break; case DCH_Q: + /* - * We ignore 'Q' when converting to date because it is - * unclear which date in the quarter to use, and some - * people specify both quarter and month, so if it was - * honored it might conflict with the supplied month. - * That is also why we don't throw an error. + * We ignore 'Q' when converting to date because it is unclear + * which date in the quarter to use, and some people specify + * both quarter and month, so if it was honored it might + * conflict with the supplied month. That is also why we don't + * throw an error. * * We still parse the source string for an integer, but it * isn't stored anywhere in 'out'. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/like_match.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/like_match.c index be3b9515df..4f762b85c3 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/like_match.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/like_match.c @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ * Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/like_match.c,v 1.29 2010/05/28 18:18:19 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/like_match.c,v 1.30 2010/07/06 19:18:58 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -116,10 +116,10 @@ MatchText(char *t, int tlen, char *p, int plen) * If there are wildcards immediately following the %, we can skip * over them first, using the idea that any sequence of N _'s and * one or more %'s is equivalent to N _'s and one % (ie, it will - * match any sequence of at least N text characters). In this - * way we will always run the recursive search loop using a - * pattern fragment that begins with a literal character-to-match, - * thereby not recursing more than we have to. + * match any sequence of at least N text characters). In this way + * we will always run the recursive search loop using a pattern + * fragment that begins with a literal character-to-match, thereby + * not recursing more than we have to. */ NextByte(p, plen); @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@ MatchText(char *t, int tlen, char *p, int plen) int matched = MatchText(t, tlen, p, plen); if (matched != LIKE_FALSE) - return matched; /* TRUE or ABORT */ + return matched; /* TRUE or ABORT */ } NextChar(t, tlen); diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/oid.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/oid.c index ba86625e27..e237178122 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/oid.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/oid.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/oid.c,v 1.77 2010/06/13 17:43:13 rhaas Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/oid.c,v 1.78 2010/07/06 19:18:58 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -314,15 +314,17 @@ oidparse(Node *node) case T_Integer: return intVal(node); case T_Float: + /* - * Values too large for int4 will be represented as Float constants - * by the lexer. Accept these if they are valid OID strings. + * Values too large for int4 will be represented as Float + * constants by the lexer. Accept these if they are valid OID + * strings. */ return oidin_subr(strVal(node), NULL); default: elog(ERROR, "unrecognized node type: %d", (int) nodeTag(node)); } - return InvalidOid; /* keep compiler quiet */ + return InvalidOid; /* keep compiler quiet */ } diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/pg_locale.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/pg_locale.c index 5b4d1736c7..2006d022fa 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/pg_locale.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/pg_locale.c @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ * * Portions Copyright (c) 2002-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/pg_locale.c,v 1.56 2010/04/26 14:17:52 momjian Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/pg_locale.c,v 1.57 2010/07/06 19:18:58 momjian Exp $ * *----------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ * * FYI, The Open Group locale standard is defined here: * - * http://www.opengroup.org/onlinepubs/009695399/basedefs/xbd_chap07.html + * http://www.opengroup.org/onlinepubs/009695399/basedefs/xbd_chap07.html *---------- */ @@ -398,13 +398,13 @@ free_struct_lconv(struct lconv * s) static char * db_encoding_strdup(int encoding, const char *str) { - char *pstr; - char *mstr; + char *pstr; + char *mstr; /* convert the string to the database encoding */ pstr = (char *) pg_do_encoding_conversion( - (unsigned char *) str, strlen(str), - encoding, GetDatabaseEncoding()); + (unsigned char *) str, strlen(str), + encoding, GetDatabaseEncoding()); mstr = strdup(pstr); if (pstr != str) pfree(pstr); @@ -428,6 +428,7 @@ PGLC_localeconv(void) char *grouping; char *thousands_sep; int encoding; + #ifdef WIN32 char *save_lc_ctype; #endif @@ -448,27 +449,27 @@ PGLC_localeconv(void) save_lc_numeric = pstrdup(save_lc_numeric); #ifdef WIN32 - /* - * Ideally, monetary and numeric local symbols could be returned in - * any server encoding. Unfortunately, the WIN32 API does not allow - * setlocale() to return values in a codepage/CTYPE that uses more - * than two bytes per character, like UTF-8: - * - * http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/x99tb11d.aspx - * - * Evidently, LC_CTYPE allows us to control the encoding used - * for strings returned by localeconv(). The Open Group - * standard, mentioned at the top of this C file, doesn't - * explicitly state this. - * - * Therefore, we set LC_CTYPE to match LC_NUMERIC or LC_MONETARY - * (which cannot be UTF8), call localeconv(), and then convert from - * the numeric/monitary LC_CTYPE to the server encoding. One - * example use of this is for the Euro symbol. - * - * Perhaps someday we will use GetLocaleInfoW() which returns values - * in UTF16 and convert from that. - */ + + /* + * Ideally, monetary and numeric local symbols could be returned in any + * server encoding. Unfortunately, the WIN32 API does not allow + * setlocale() to return values in a codepage/CTYPE that uses more than + * two bytes per character, like UTF-8: + * + * http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/x99tb11d.aspx + * + * Evidently, LC_CTYPE allows us to control the encoding used for strings + * returned by localeconv(). The Open Group standard, mentioned at the + * top of this C file, doesn't explicitly state this. + * + * Therefore, we set LC_CTYPE to match LC_NUMERIC or LC_MONETARY (which + * cannot be UTF8), call localeconv(), and then convert from the + * numeric/monitary LC_CTYPE to the server encoding. One example use of + * this is for the Euro symbol. + * + * Perhaps someday we will use GetLocaleInfoW() which returns values in + * UTF16 and convert from that. + */ /* save user's value of ctype locale */ save_lc_ctype = setlocale(LC_CTYPE, NULL); @@ -567,6 +568,7 @@ strftime_win32(char *dst, size_t dstlen, const wchar_t *format, const struct tm len = wcsftime(wbuf, MAX_L10N_DATA, format, tm); if (len == 0) + /* * strftime call failed - return 0 with the contents of dst * unspecified @@ -595,7 +597,6 @@ strftime_win32(char *dst, size_t dstlen, const wchar_t *format, const struct tm /* redefine strftime() */ #define strftime(a,b,c,d) strftime_win32(a,b,L##c,d) - #endif /* WIN32 */ @@ -611,6 +612,7 @@ cache_locale_time(void) char buf[MAX_L10N_DATA]; char *ptr; int i; + #ifdef WIN32 char *save_lc_ctype; #endif @@ -627,13 +629,14 @@ cache_locale_time(void) save_lc_time = pstrdup(save_lc_time); #ifdef WIN32 + /* * On WIN32, there is no way to get locale-specific time values in a * specified locale, like we do for monetary/numeric. We can only get * CP_ACP (see strftime_win32) or UTF16. Therefore, we get UTF16 and - * convert it to the database locale. However, wcsftime() internally - * uses LC_CTYPE, so we set it here. See the WIN32 comment near the - * top of PGLC_localeconv(). + * convert it to the database locale. However, wcsftime() internally uses + * LC_CTYPE, so we set it here. See the WIN32 comment near the top of + * PGLC_localeconv(). */ /* save user's value of ctype locale */ diff --git a/src/backend/utils/adt/xml.c b/src/backend/utils/adt/xml.c index 3719e3715e..eaf5b4d550 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/adt/xml.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/adt/xml.c @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/xml.c,v 1.97 2010/03/03 17:29:45 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/adt/xml.c,v 1.98 2010/07/06 19:18:58 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -846,7 +846,7 @@ xml_is_document(xmltype *arg) * pg_xml_init --- set up for use of libxml * * This should be called by each function that is about to use libxml - * facilities. It has two responsibilities: verify compatibility with the + * facilities. It has two responsibilities: verify compatibility with the * loaded libxml version (done on first call in a session) and establish * or re-establish our libxml error handler. The latter needs to be done * anytime we might have passed control to add-on modules (eg libperl) which @@ -1121,7 +1121,7 @@ static bool print_xml_decl(StringInfo buf, const xmlChar *version, pg_enc encoding, int standalone) { - pg_xml_init(); /* why is this here? */ + pg_xml_init(); /* why is this here? */ if ((version && strcmp((char *) version, PG_XML_DEFAULT_VERSION) != 0) || (encoding && encoding != PG_UTF8) @@ -1338,8 +1338,8 @@ xml_ereport(int level, int sqlcode, const char *msg) /* * It might seem that we should just pass xml_err_buf->data directly to * errdetail. However, we want to clean out xml_err_buf before throwing - * error, in case there is another function using libxml further down - * the call stack. + * error, in case there is another function using libxml further down the + * call stack. */ if (xml_err_buf->len > 0) { diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c index 111292fa30..da89c8a7e4 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c,v 1.152 2010/04/20 23:48:47 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/cache/catcache.c,v 1.153 2010/07/06 19:18:58 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -994,6 +994,7 @@ IndexScanOK(CatCache *cache, ScanKey cur_skey) switch (cache->id) { case INDEXRELID: + /* * Rather than tracking exactly which indexes have to be loaded * before we can use indexscans (which changes from time to time), @@ -1006,6 +1007,7 @@ IndexScanOK(CatCache *cache, ScanKey cur_skey) case AMOID: case AMNAME: + /* * Always do heap scans in pg_am, because it's so small there's * not much point in an indexscan anyway. We *must* do this when @@ -1017,6 +1019,7 @@ IndexScanOK(CatCache *cache, ScanKey cur_skey) case AUTHNAME: case AUTHOID: case AUTHMEMMEMROLE: + /* * Protect authentication lookups occurring before relcache has * collected entries for shared indexes. diff --git a/src/backend/utils/cache/relcache.c b/src/backend/utils/cache/relcache.c index 1ce08a3e6a..f4304bce72 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/cache/relcache.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/cache/relcache.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/cache/relcache.c,v 1.310 2010/04/20 23:48:47 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/cache/relcache.c,v 1.311 2010/07/06 19:18:58 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -1832,7 +1832,7 @@ RelationDestroyRelation(Relation relation) * * NB: when rebuilding, we'd better hold some lock on the relation, * else the catalog data we need to read could be changing under us. - * Also, a rel to be rebuilt had better have refcnt > 0. This is because + * Also, a rel to be rebuilt had better have refcnt > 0. This is because * an sinval reset could happen while we're accessing the catalogs, and * the rel would get blown away underneath us by RelationCacheInvalidate * if it has zero refcnt. @@ -1847,8 +1847,8 @@ RelationClearRelation(Relation relation, bool rebuild) Oid old_reltype = relation->rd_rel->reltype; /* - * As per notes above, a rel to be rebuilt MUST have refcnt > 0; while - * of course it would be a bad idea to blow away one with nonzero refcnt. + * As per notes above, a rel to be rebuilt MUST have refcnt > 0; while of + * course it would be a bad idea to blow away one with nonzero refcnt. */ Assert(rebuild ? !RelationHasReferenceCountZero(relation) : @@ -2051,9 +2051,9 @@ RelationFlushRelation(Relation relation) * forget the "new" status of the relation, which is a useful * optimization to have. Ditto for the new-relfilenode status. * - * The rel could have zero refcnt here, so temporarily increment - * the refcnt to ensure it's safe to rebuild it. We can assume that - * the current transaction has some lock on the rel already. + * The rel could have zero refcnt here, so temporarily increment the + * refcnt to ensure it's safe to rebuild it. We can assume that the + * current transaction has some lock on the rel already. */ RelationIncrementReferenceCount(relation); RelationClearRelation(relation, true); @@ -2064,7 +2064,7 @@ RelationFlushRelation(Relation relation) /* * Pre-existing rels can be dropped from the relcache if not open. */ - bool rebuild = !RelationHasReferenceCountZero(relation); + bool rebuild = !RelationHasReferenceCountZero(relation); RelationClearRelation(relation, rebuild); } @@ -2775,8 +2775,8 @@ RelationCacheInitializePhase2(void) RelationMapInitializePhase2(); /* - * In bootstrap mode, the shared catalogs aren't there yet anyway, - * so do nothing. + * In bootstrap mode, the shared catalogs aren't there yet anyway, so do + * nothing. */ if (IsBootstrapProcessingMode()) return; diff --git a/src/backend/utils/init/postinit.c b/src/backend/utils/init/postinit.c index dab7694f70..099f4db883 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/init/postinit.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/init/postinit.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/init/postinit.c,v 1.212 2010/04/26 10:52:00 rhaas Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/init/postinit.c,v 1.213 2010/07/06 19:18:58 momjian Exp $ * * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -218,21 +218,22 @@ PerformAuthentication(Port *port) elog(FATAL, "could not disable timer for authorization timeout"); /* - * Log connection for streaming replication even if Log_connections disabled. + * Log connection for streaming replication even if Log_connections + * disabled. */ if (am_walsender) { if (port->remote_port[0]) ereport(LOG, - (errmsg("replication connection authorized: user=%s host=%s port=%s", - port->user_name, - port->remote_host, - port->remote_port))); + (errmsg("replication connection authorized: user=%s host=%s port=%s", + port->user_name, + port->remote_host, + port->remote_port))); else ereport(LOG, (errmsg("replication connection authorized: user=%s host=%s", - port->user_name, - port->remote_host))); + port->user_name, + port->remote_host))); } else if (Log_connections) ereport(LOG, @@ -515,8 +516,8 @@ InitPostgres(const char *in_dbname, Oid dboid, const char *username, if (IsUnderPostmaster) { /* - * The postmaster already started the XLOG machinery, but we need - * to call InitXLOGAccess(), if the system isn't in hot-standby mode. + * The postmaster already started the XLOG machinery, but we need to + * call InitXLOGAccess(), if the system isn't in hot-standby mode. * This is handled by calling RecoveryInProgress and ignoring the * result. */ @@ -525,9 +526,9 @@ InitPostgres(const char *in_dbname, Oid dboid, const char *username, else { /* - * We are either a bootstrap process or a standalone backend. - * Either way, start up the XLOG machinery, and register to have it - * closed down at exit. + * We are either a bootstrap process or a standalone backend. Either + * way, start up the XLOG machinery, and register to have it closed + * down at exit. */ StartupXLOG(); on_shmem_exit(ShutdownXLOG, 0); @@ -618,8 +619,8 @@ InitPostgres(const char *in_dbname, Oid dboid, const char *username, } /* - * If we're trying to shut down, only superusers can connect, and - * new replication connections are not allowed. + * If we're trying to shut down, only superusers can connect, and new + * replication connections are not allowed. */ if ((!am_superuser || am_walsender) && MyProcPort != NULL && @@ -628,18 +629,18 @@ InitPostgres(const char *in_dbname, Oid dboid, const char *username, if (am_walsender) ereport(FATAL, (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE), - errmsg("new replication connections are not allowed during database shutdown"))); + errmsg("new replication connections are not allowed during database shutdown"))); else ereport(FATAL, (errcode(ERRCODE_INSUFFICIENT_PRIVILEGE), - errmsg("must be superuser to connect during database shutdown"))); + errmsg("must be superuser to connect during database shutdown"))); } /* - * The last few connections slots are reserved for superusers. - * Although replication connections currently require superuser - * privileges, we don't allow them to consume the reserved slots, - * which are intended for interactive use. + * The last few connections slots are reserved for superusers. Although + * replication connections currently require superuser privileges, we + * don't allow them to consume the reserved slots, which are intended for + * interactive use. */ if ((!am_superuser || am_walsender) && ReservedBackends > 0 && diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mb/mbutils.c b/src/backend/utils/mb/mbutils.c index 71945b0621..5e1721397a 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/mb/mbutils.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/mb/mbutils.c @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ * * Tatsuo Ishii * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/mb/mbutils.c,v 1.95 2010/02/27 03:55:52 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/mb/mbutils.c,v 1.96 2010/07/06 19:18:58 momjian Exp $ */ #include "postgres.h" @@ -1016,7 +1016,7 @@ pgwin32_toUTF16(const char *str, int len, int *utf16len) { utf16 = (WCHAR *) palloc(sizeof(WCHAR) * (len + 1)); dstlen = MultiByteToWideChar(codepage, 0, str, len, utf16, len); - utf16[dstlen] = L'\0'; + utf16[dstlen] = L '\0'; } else { @@ -1029,7 +1029,7 @@ pgwin32_toUTF16(const char *str, int len, int *utf16len) utf16 = (WCHAR *) palloc(sizeof(WCHAR) * (len + 1)); dstlen = MultiByteToWideChar(CP_UTF8, 0, utf8, len, utf16, len); - utf16[dstlen] = L'\0'; + utf16[dstlen] = L '\0'; if (utf8 != str) pfree(utf8); diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/guc.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/guc.c index ac7f1a26fc..dd0e10ca93 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/misc/guc.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/guc.c @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ * Written by Peter Eisentraut <peter_e@gmx.net>. * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/misc/guc.c,v 1.559 2010/07/03 21:23:58 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/misc/guc.c,v 1.560 2010/07/06 19:18:58 momjian Exp $ * *-------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -2893,7 +2893,7 @@ static void ShowAllGUCConfig(DestReceiver *dest); static char *_ShowOption(struct config_generic * record, bool use_units); static bool is_newvalue_equal(struct config_generic * record, const char *newvalue); static bool validate_option_array_item(const char *name, const char *value, - bool skipIfNoPermissions); + bool skipIfNoPermissions); /* @@ -5905,12 +5905,13 @@ define_custom_variable(struct config_generic * variable) case PGC_S_DATABASE: case PGC_S_USER: case PGC_S_DATABASE_USER: + /* - * The existing value came from an ALTER ROLE/DATABASE SET command. - * We can assume that at the time the command was issued, we - * checked that the issuing user was superuser if the variable - * requires superuser privileges to set. So it's safe to - * use SUSET context here. + * The existing value came from an ALTER ROLE/DATABASE SET + * command. We can assume that at the time the command was issued, + * we checked that the issuing user was superuser if the variable + * requires superuser privileges to set. So it's safe to use + * SUSET context here. */ phcontext = PGC_SUSET; break; @@ -5918,9 +5919,10 @@ define_custom_variable(struct config_generic * variable) case PGC_S_CLIENT: case PGC_S_SESSION: default: + /* - * We must assume that the value came from an untrusted user, - * even if the current_user is a superuser. + * We must assume that the value came from an untrusted user, even + * if the current_user is a superuser. */ phcontext = PGC_USERSET; break; @@ -7443,7 +7445,7 @@ GUCArrayReset(ArrayType *array) * Validate a proposed option setting for GUCArrayAdd/Delete/Reset. * * name is the option name. value is the proposed value for the Add case, - * or NULL for the Delete/Reset cases. If skipIfNoPermissions is true, it's + * or NULL for the Delete/Reset cases. If skipIfNoPermissions is true, it's * not an error to have no permissions to set the option. * * Returns TRUE if OK, FALSE if skipIfNoPermissions is true and user does not @@ -7465,19 +7467,19 @@ validate_option_array_item(const char *name, const char *value, * SUSET and user is superuser). * * name is not known, but exists or can be created as a placeholder - * (implying it has a prefix listed in custom_variable_classes). - * We allow this case if you're a superuser, otherwise not. Superusers - * are assumed to know what they're doing. We can't allow it for other - * users, because when the placeholder is resolved it might turn out to - * be a SUSET variable; define_custom_variable assumes we checked that. + * (implying it has a prefix listed in custom_variable_classes). We allow + * this case if you're a superuser, otherwise not. Superusers are assumed + * to know what they're doing. We can't allow it for other users, because + * when the placeholder is resolved it might turn out to be a SUSET + * variable; define_custom_variable assumes we checked that. * * name is not known and can't be created as a placeholder. Throw error, - * unless skipIfNoPermissions is true, in which case return FALSE. - * (It's tempting to allow this case to superusers, if the name is - * qualified but not listed in custom_variable_classes. That would - * ease restoring of dumps containing ALTER ROLE/DATABASE SET. However, - * it's not clear that this usage justifies such a loss of error checking. - * You can always fix custom_variable_classes before you restore.) + * unless skipIfNoPermissions is true, in which case return FALSE. (It's + * tempting to allow this case to superusers, if the name is qualified but + * not listed in custom_variable_classes. That would ease restoring of + * dumps containing ALTER ROLE/DATABASE SET. However, it's not clear that + * this usage justifies such a loss of error checking. You can always fix + * custom_variable_classes before you restore.) */ gconf = find_option(name, true, WARNING); if (!gconf) @@ -7487,7 +7489,7 @@ validate_option_array_item(const char *name, const char *value, return false; ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_UNDEFINED_OBJECT), - errmsg("unrecognized configuration parameter \"%s\"", name))); + errmsg("unrecognized configuration parameter \"%s\"", name))); } if (gconf->flags & GUC_CUSTOM_PLACEHOLDER) @@ -7507,9 +7509,9 @@ validate_option_array_item(const char *name, const char *value, /* manual permissions check so we can avoid an error being thrown */ if (gconf->context == PGC_USERSET) - /* ok */ ; + /* ok */ ; else if (gconf->context == PGC_SUSET && superuser()) - /* ok */ ; + /* ok */ ; else if (skipIfNoPermissions) return false; /* if a permissions error should be thrown, let set_config_option do it */ diff --git a/src/backend/utils/misc/ps_status.c b/src/backend/utils/misc/ps_status.c index 17177f55dd..9f0f9d5f5d 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/misc/ps_status.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/misc/ps_status.c @@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ * to contain some useful information. Mechanism differs wildly across * platforms. * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/misc/ps_status.c,v 1.41 2010/05/27 19:19:38 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/misc/ps_status.c,v 1.42 2010/07/06 19:18:59 momjian Exp $ * * Copyright (c) 2000-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * various details abducted from various places @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ static size_t ps_buffer_size; /* space determined at run time */ static size_t last_status_len; /* use to minimize length of clobber */ #endif /* PS_USE_CLOBBER_ARGV */ -static size_t ps_buffer_cur_len; /* nominal strlen(ps_buffer) */ +static size_t ps_buffer_cur_len; /* nominal strlen(ps_buffer) */ static size_t ps_buffer_fixed_size; /* size of the constant prefix */ diff --git a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/portalmem.c b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/portalmem.c index 64b29906d9..5dc60d9754 100644 --- a/src/backend/utils/mmgr/portalmem.c +++ b/src/backend/utils/mmgr/portalmem.c @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/mmgr/portalmem.c,v 1.119 2010/07/05 09:27:17 heikki Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/backend/utils/mmgr/portalmem.c,v 1.120 2010/07/06 19:18:59 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -775,9 +775,9 @@ AtCleanup_Portals(void) } /* - * If a portal is still pinned, forcibly unpin it. PortalDrop will - * not let us drop the portal otherwise. Whoever pinned the portal - * was interrupted by the abort too and won't try to use it anymore. + * If a portal is still pinned, forcibly unpin it. PortalDrop will not + * let us drop the portal otherwise. Whoever pinned the portal was + * interrupted by the abort too and won't try to use it anymore. */ if (portal->portalPinned) portal->portalPinned = false; diff --git a/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_archiver.c b/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_archiver.c index 20d86fb1a8..61e4e41222 100644 --- a/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_archiver.c +++ b/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_archiver.c @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_archiver.c,v 1.186 2010/06/28 02:07:02 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_archiver.c,v 1.187 2010/07/06 19:18:59 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -2989,8 +2989,8 @@ ReadHead(ArchiveHandle *AH) /* * If we haven't already read the header, do so. * - * NB: this code must agree with _discoverArchiveFormat(). Maybe find - * a way to unify the cases? + * NB: this code must agree with _discoverArchiveFormat(). Maybe find a + * way to unify the cases? */ if (!AH->readHeader) { @@ -3085,8 +3085,8 @@ checkSeek(FILE *fp) pgoff_t tpos; /* - * If pgoff_t is wider than long, we must have "real" fseeko and not - * an emulation using fseek. Otherwise report no seek capability. + * If pgoff_t is wider than long, we must have "real" fseeko and not an + * emulation using fseek. Otherwise report no seek capability. */ #ifndef HAVE_FSEEKO if (sizeof(pgoff_t) > sizeof(long)) @@ -3100,7 +3100,7 @@ checkSeek(FILE *fp) return false; /* - * Check that fseeko(SEEK_SET) works, too. NB: we used to try to test + * Check that fseeko(SEEK_SET) works, too. NB: we used to try to test * this with fseeko(fp, 0, SEEK_CUR). But some platforms treat that as a * successful no-op even on files that are otherwise unseekable. */ diff --git a/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_custom.c b/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_custom.c index 3c1678ca9c..8b7ceb64c7 100644 --- a/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_custom.c +++ b/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_custom.c @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_custom.c,v 1.46 2010/06/28 02:07:02 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_backup_custom.c,v 1.47 2010/07/06 19:18:59 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -448,9 +448,9 @@ _PrintTocData(ArchiveHandle *AH, TocEntry *te, RestoreOptions *ropt) if (!ctx->hasSeek || tctx->dataState == K_OFFSET_POS_NOT_SET) { /* - * We cannot seek directly to the desired block. Instead, skip - * over block headers until we find the one we want. This could - * fail if we are asked to restore items out-of-order. + * We cannot seek directly to the desired block. Instead, skip over + * block headers until we find the one we want. This could fail if we + * are asked to restore items out-of-order. */ _readBlockHeader(AH, &blkType, &id); @@ -496,9 +496,9 @@ _PrintTocData(ArchiveHandle *AH, TocEntry *te, RestoreOptions *ropt) else if (!ctx->hasSeek) die_horribly(AH, modulename, "could not find block ID %d in archive -- " "possibly due to out-of-order restore request, " - "which cannot be handled due to non-seekable input file\n", + "which cannot be handled due to non-seekable input file\n", te->dumpId); - else /* huh, the dataPos led us to EOF? */ + else /* huh, the dataPos led us to EOF? */ die_horribly(AH, modulename, "could not find block ID %d in archive -- " "possibly corrupt archive\n", te->dumpId); @@ -836,9 +836,9 @@ _CloseArchive(ArchiveHandle *AH) /* * If possible, re-write the TOC in order to update the data offset - * information. This is not essential, as pg_restore can cope in - * most cases without it; but it can make pg_restore significantly - * faster in some situations (especially parallel restore). + * information. This is not essential, as pg_restore can cope in most + * cases without it; but it can make pg_restore significantly faster + * in some situations (especially parallel restore). */ if (ctx->hasSeek && fseeko(AH->FH, tpos, SEEK_SET) == 0) diff --git a/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dump.c b/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dump.c index 1df0aa12fd..6943187aac 100644 --- a/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dump.c +++ b/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dump.c @@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ * http://archives.postgresql.org/pgsql-bugs/2010-02/msg00187.php * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dump.c,v 1.580 2010/05/15 21:41:16 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/pg_dump/pg_dump.c,v 1.581 2010/07/06 19:18:59 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -3957,8 +3957,8 @@ getIndexes(TableInfo tblinfo[], int numTables) * find one, create a CONSTRAINT entry linked to the INDEX entry. We * assume an index won't have more than one internal dependency. * - * As of 9.0 we don't need to look at pg_depend but can check for - * a match to pg_constraint.conindid. The check on conrelid is + * As of 9.0 we don't need to look at pg_depend but can check for a + * match to pg_constraint.conindid. The check on conrelid is * redundant but useful because that column is indexed while conindid * is not. */ diff --git a/src/bin/psql/command.c b/src/bin/psql/command.c index 46cc0b6f69..acc5d35cf9 100644 --- a/src/bin/psql/command.c +++ b/src/bin/psql/command.c @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ * * Copyright (c) 2000-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/command.c,v 1.220 2010/05/21 17:37:44 rhaas Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/command.c,v 1.221 2010/07/06 19:18:59 momjian Exp $ */ #include "postgres_fe.h" #include "command.h" @@ -659,7 +659,7 @@ exec_command(const char *cmd, len = strlen(opt); while (len > 0 && (isspace((unsigned char) opt[len - 1]) - || opt[len - 1] == ';')) + || opt[len - 1] == ';')) opt[--len] = '\0'; } diff --git a/src/bin/psql/common.c b/src/bin/psql/common.c index cdb071f85e..6cef2bafcf 100644 --- a/src/bin/psql/common.c +++ b/src/bin/psql/common.c @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ * * Copyright (c) 2000-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/common.c,v 1.145 2010/05/28 20:02:32 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/common.c,v 1.146 2010/07/06 19:18:59 momjian Exp $ */ #include "postgres_fe.h" #include "common.h" @@ -1108,18 +1108,18 @@ ExecQueryUsingCursor(const char *query, double *elapsed_msec) /* * Make sure to flush the output stream, so intermediate results are - * visible to the client immediately. We check the results because - * if the pager dies/exits/etc, there's no sense throwing more data - * at it. + * visible to the client immediately. We check the results because if + * the pager dies/exits/etc, there's no sense throwing more data at + * it. */ flush_error = fflush(pset.queryFout); /* - * Check if we are at the end, if a cancel was pressed, or if - * there were any errors either trying to flush out the results, - * or more generally on the output stream at all. If we hit any - * errors writing things to the stream, we presume $PAGER has - * disappeared and stop bothering to pull down more data. + * Check if we are at the end, if a cancel was pressed, or if there + * were any errors either trying to flush out the results, or more + * generally on the output stream at all. If we hit any errors + * writing things to the stream, we presume $PAGER has disappeared and + * stop bothering to pull down more data. */ if (ntuples < pset.fetch_count || cancel_pressed || flush_error || ferror(pset.queryFout)) diff --git a/src/bin/psql/describe.c b/src/bin/psql/describe.c index 659df7ad09..954ce42b68 100644 --- a/src/bin/psql/describe.c +++ b/src/bin/psql/describe.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * Copyright (c) 2000-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/describe.c,v 1.241 2010/03/11 21:29:32 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/describe.c,v 1.242 2010/07/06 19:18:59 momjian Exp $ */ #include "postgres_fe.h" @@ -1414,13 +1414,13 @@ describeOneTableDetails(const char *schemaname, if (pset.sversion >= 90000) appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, " (NOT i.indimmediate) AND " - "EXISTS (SELECT 1 FROM pg_catalog.pg_constraint " + "EXISTS (SELECT 1 FROM pg_catalog.pg_constraint " "WHERE conrelid = i.indrelid AND " "conindid = i.indexrelid AND " "contype IN ('p','u','x') AND " "condeferrable) AS condeferrable,\n" " (NOT i.indimmediate) AND " - "EXISTS (SELECT 1 FROM pg_catalog.pg_constraint " + "EXISTS (SELECT 1 FROM pg_catalog.pg_constraint " "WHERE conrelid = i.indrelid AND " "conindid = i.indexrelid AND " "contype IN ('p','u','x') AND " @@ -1545,12 +1545,12 @@ describeOneTableDetails(const char *schemaname, appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, "pg_catalog.pg_get_indexdef(i.indexrelid, 0, true),\n "); if (pset.sversion >= 90000) appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, - "pg_catalog.pg_get_constraintdef(con.oid, true), " + "pg_catalog.pg_get_constraintdef(con.oid, true), " "contype, condeferrable, condeferred"); else appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, "null AS constraintdef, null AS contype, " - "false AS condeferrable, false AS condeferred"); + "false AS condeferrable, false AS condeferred"); if (pset.sversion >= 80000) appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, ", c2.reltablespace"); appendPQExpBuffer(&buf, @@ -1621,7 +1621,7 @@ describeOneTableDetails(const char *schemaname, /* Print tablespace of the index on the same line */ if (pset.sversion >= 80000) add_tablespace_footer(&cont, 'i', - atooid(PQgetvalue(result, i, 10)), + atooid(PQgetvalue(result, i, 10)), false); } } diff --git a/src/bin/psql/print.c b/src/bin/psql/print.c index f6ad13bed8..9c38be1fd2 100644 --- a/src/bin/psql/print.c +++ b/src/bin/psql/print.c @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ * * Copyright (c) 2000-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/print.c,v 1.127 2010/05/09 18:17:47 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/print.c,v 1.128 2010/07/06 19:19:00 momjian Exp $ */ #include "postgres_fe.h" @@ -928,14 +928,14 @@ print_aligned_text(const printTableContent *cont, FILE *fout) /* spaces first */ fprintf(fout, "%*s", width_wrap[j] - chars_to_output, ""); fputnbytes(fout, - (char *) (this_line->ptr + bytes_output[j]), + (char *) (this_line->ptr + bytes_output[j]), bytes_to_output); } else /* Left aligned cell */ { /* spaces second */ fputnbytes(fout, - (char *) (this_line->ptr + bytes_output[j]), + (char *) (this_line->ptr + bytes_output[j]), bytes_to_output); } @@ -2152,7 +2152,7 @@ printTableAddCell(printTableContent *const content, const char *cell, { if (content->cellmustfree == NULL) content->cellmustfree = pg_local_calloc( - content->ncolumns * content->nrows + 1, sizeof(bool)); + content->ncolumns * content->nrows + 1, sizeof(bool)); content->cellmustfree[content->cellsadded] = true; } @@ -2220,7 +2220,8 @@ printTableCleanup(printTableContent *const content) { if (content->cellmustfree) { - int i; + int i; + for (i = 0; i < content->nrows * content->ncolumns; i++) { if (content->cellmustfree[i]) diff --git a/src/bin/psql/print.h b/src/bin/psql/print.h index f8de2b6344..ceb3b28452 100644 --- a/src/bin/psql/print.h +++ b/src/bin/psql/print.h @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ * * Copyright (c) 2000-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/print.h,v 1.45 2010/03/01 20:55:45 heikki Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/print.h,v 1.46 2010/07/06 19:19:00 momjian Exp $ */ #ifndef PRINT_H #define PRINT_H @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ extern void printTableInit(printTableContent *const content, extern void printTableAddHeader(printTableContent *const content, const char *header, const bool translate, const char align); extern void printTableAddCell(printTableContent *const content, - const char *cell, const bool translate, const bool mustfree); + const char *cell, const bool translate, const bool mustfree); extern void printTableAddFooter(printTableContent *const content, const char *footer); extern void printTableSetFooter(printTableContent *const content, diff --git a/src/bin/psql/tab-complete.c b/src/bin/psql/tab-complete.c index 7b6abd3873..e79e1e84ac 100644 --- a/src/bin/psql/tab-complete.c +++ b/src/bin/psql/tab-complete.c @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ * * Copyright (c) 2000-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/tab-complete.c,v 1.199 2010/06/07 02:59:02 itagaki Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/bin/psql/tab-complete.c,v 1.200 2010/07/06 19:19:00 momjian Exp $ */ /*---------------------------------------------------------------------- @@ -710,7 +710,7 @@ psql_completion(char *text, int start, int end) else if (pg_strcasecmp(prev3_wd, "ALTER") == 0 && (pg_strcasecmp(prev2_wd, "AGGREGATE") == 0 || pg_strcasecmp(prev2_wd, "FUNCTION") == 0)) - COMPLETE_WITH_CONST("("); + COMPLETE_WITH_CONST("("); /* ALTER AGGREGATE,FUNCTION <name> (...) */ else if (pg_strcasecmp(prev4_wd, "ALTER") == 0 && (pg_strcasecmp(prev3_wd, "AGGREGATE") == 0 || diff --git a/src/include/access/nbtree.h b/src/include/access/nbtree.h index 775c47da55..e3426f6ea2 100644 --- a/src/include/access/nbtree.h +++ b/src/include/access/nbtree.h @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/access/nbtree.h,v 1.134 2010/03/28 09:27:02 sriggs Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/access/nbtree.h,v 1.135 2010/07/06 19:19:00 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -314,9 +314,10 @@ typedef struct xl_btree_split */ typedef struct xl_btree_delete { - RelFileNode node; /* RelFileNode of the index */ + RelFileNode node; /* RelFileNode of the index */ BlockNumber block; - RelFileNode hnode; /* RelFileNode of the heap the index currently points at */ + RelFileNode hnode; /* RelFileNode of the heap the index currently + * points at */ int nitems; /* TARGET OFFSET NUMBERS FOLLOW AT THE END */ @@ -589,9 +590,9 @@ extern void _bt_relbuf(Relation rel, Buffer buf); extern void _bt_pageinit(Page page, Size size); extern bool _bt_page_recyclable(Page page); extern void _bt_delitems_delete(Relation rel, Buffer buf, - OffsetNumber *itemnos, int nitems, Relation heapRel); + OffsetNumber *itemnos, int nitems, Relation heapRel); extern void _bt_delitems_vacuum(Relation rel, Buffer buf, - OffsetNumber *itemnos, int nitems, BlockNumber lastBlockVacuumed); + OffsetNumber *itemnos, int nitems, BlockNumber lastBlockVacuumed); extern int _bt_pagedel(Relation rel, Buffer buf, BTStack stack); /* diff --git a/src/include/nodes/relation.h b/src/include/nodes/relation.h index bdee19cc3a..a684f19222 100644 --- a/src/include/nodes/relation.h +++ b/src/include/nodes/relation.h @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/nodes/relation.h,v 1.186 2010/03/30 21:58:11 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/nodes/relation.h,v 1.187 2010/07/06 19:19:00 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -197,8 +197,8 @@ typedef struct PlannerInfo double tuple_fraction; /* tuple_fraction passed to query_planner */ - bool hasInheritedTarget; /* true if parse->resultRelation is an - * inheritance child rel */ + bool hasInheritedTarget; /* true if parse->resultRelation is an + * inheritance child rel */ bool hasJoinRTEs; /* true if any RTEs are RTE_JOIN kind */ bool hasHavingQual; /* true if havingQual was non-null */ bool hasPseudoConstantQuals; /* true if any RestrictInfo has diff --git a/src/include/port/win32.h b/src/include/port/win32.h index 5e611d4234..da5d6614df 100644 --- a/src/include/port/win32.h +++ b/src/include/port/win32.h @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/port/win32.h,v 1.95 2010/05/28 16:34:15 itagaki Exp $ */ +/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/port/win32.h,v 1.96 2010/07/06 19:19:00 momjian Exp $ */ #if defined(_MSC_VER) || defined(__BORLANDC__) #define WIN32_ONLY_COMPILER @@ -63,7 +63,6 @@ #else #define PGDLLEXPORT __declspec (dllimport) #endif - #else /* not CYGWIN, not MSVC, not MingW */ #define PGDLLIMPORT #define PGDLLEXPORT diff --git a/src/include/replication/walprotocol.h b/src/include/replication/walprotocol.h index 15025a277c..edba868193 100644 --- a/src/include/replication/walprotocol.h +++ b/src/include/replication/walprotocol.h @@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ * * Portions Copyright (c) 2010-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/replication/walprotocol.h,v 1.1 2010/06/03 22:17:32 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/replication/walprotocol.h,v 1.2 2010/07/06 19:19:00 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -36,11 +36,11 @@ typedef struct XLogRecPtr walEnd; /* Sender's system clock at the time of transmission */ - TimestampTz sendTime; + TimestampTz sendTime; } WalDataMessageHeader; /* - * Maximum data payload in a WAL data message. Must be >= XLOG_BLCKSZ. + * Maximum data payload in a WAL data message. Must be >= XLOG_BLCKSZ. * * We don't have a good idea of what a good value would be; there's some * overhead per message in both walsender and walreceiver, but on the other diff --git a/src/include/replication/walreceiver.h b/src/include/replication/walreceiver.h index 734380ee4f..9e59db4ee0 100644 --- a/src/include/replication/walreceiver.h +++ b/src/include/replication/walreceiver.h @@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ * * Portions Copyright (c) 2010-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/replication/walreceiver.h,v 1.10 2010/07/03 20:43:58 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/replication/walreceiver.h,v 1.11 2010/07/06 19:19:00 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -42,7 +42,8 @@ typedef struct { /* * PID of currently active walreceiver process, its current state and - * start time (actually, the time at which it was requested to be started). + * start time (actually, the time at which it was requested to be + * started). */ pid_t pid; WalRcvState walRcvState; @@ -51,16 +52,16 @@ typedef struct /* * receivedUpto-1 is the last byte position that has already been * received. When startup process starts the walreceiver, it sets - * receivedUpto to the point where it wants the streaming to begin. - * After that, walreceiver updates this whenever it flushes the received - * WAL to disk. + * receivedUpto to the point where it wants the streaming to begin. After + * that, walreceiver updates this whenever it flushes the received WAL to + * disk. */ XLogRecPtr receivedUpto; /* * latestChunkStart is the starting byte position of the current "batch" * of received WAL. It's actually the same as the previous value of - * receivedUpto before the last flush to disk. Startup process can use + * receivedUpto before the last flush to disk. Startup process can use * this to detect whether it's keeping up or not. */ XLogRecPtr latestChunkStart; diff --git a/src/include/storage/pmsignal.h b/src/include/storage/pmsignal.h index 7623b5792d..1dc42ecc0a 100644 --- a/src/include/storage/pmsignal.h +++ b/src/include/storage/pmsignal.h @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/storage/pmsignal.h,v 1.31 2010/05/15 20:01:32 rhaas Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/storage/pmsignal.h,v 1.32 2010/07/06 19:19:00 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ typedef enum { PMSIGNAL_RECOVERY_STARTED, /* recovery has started */ - PMSIGNAL_BEGIN_HOT_STANDBY, /* begin Hot Standby */ + PMSIGNAL_BEGIN_HOT_STANDBY, /* begin Hot Standby */ PMSIGNAL_WAKEN_ARCHIVER, /* send a NOTIFY signal to xlog archiver */ PMSIGNAL_ROTATE_LOGFILE, /* send SIGUSR1 to syslogger to rotate logfile */ PMSIGNAL_START_AUTOVAC_LAUNCHER, /* start an autovacuum launcher */ diff --git a/src/include/storage/proc.h b/src/include/storage/proc.h index 40a0585291..f77c4d3fc2 100644 --- a/src/include/storage/proc.h +++ b/src/include/storage/proc.h @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/storage/proc.h,v 1.122 2010/05/26 19:52:52 sriggs Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/storage/proc.h,v 1.123 2010/07/06 19:19:00 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ extern bool disable_sig_alarm(bool is_statement_timeout); extern void handle_sig_alarm(SIGNAL_ARGS); extern bool enable_standby_sig_alarm(TimestampTz now, - TimestampTz fin_time, bool deadlock_only); + TimestampTz fin_time, bool deadlock_only); extern bool disable_standby_sig_alarm(void); extern void handle_standby_sig_alarm(SIGNAL_ARGS); diff --git a/src/include/storage/procarray.h b/src/include/storage/procarray.h index e92809d58d..a64101f85a 100644 --- a/src/include/storage/procarray.h +++ b/src/include/storage/procarray.h @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/storage/procarray.h,v 1.32 2010/05/13 11:15:38 sriggs Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/storage/procarray.h,v 1.33 2010/07/06 19:19:00 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -35,8 +35,8 @@ extern void ProcArrayApplyXidAssignment(TransactionId topxid, extern void RecordKnownAssignedTransactionIds(TransactionId xid); extern void ExpireTreeKnownAssignedTransactionIds(TransactionId xid, - int nsubxids, TransactionId *subxids, - TransactionId max_xid); + int nsubxids, TransactionId *subxids, + TransactionId max_xid); extern void ExpireAllKnownAssignedTransactionIds(void); extern void ExpireOldKnownAssignedTransactionIds(TransactionId xid); diff --git a/src/include/utils/builtins.h b/src/include/utils/builtins.h index 1fc36d7406..a95c608f04 100644 --- a/src/include/utils/builtins.h +++ b/src/include/utils/builtins.h @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/builtins.h,v 1.349 2010/06/13 17:43:13 rhaas Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/include/utils/builtins.h,v 1.350 2010/07/06 19:19:00 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -479,7 +479,7 @@ extern Datum oidvectorle(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); extern Datum oidvectorge(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); extern Datum oidvectorgt(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); extern oidvector *buildoidvector(const Oid *oids, int n); -extern Oid oidparse(Node *node); +extern Oid oidparse(Node *node); /* pseudotypes.c */ extern Datum cstring_in(PG_FUNCTION_ARGS); diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/connect.c b/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/connect.c index a124a89495..c05dc9014e 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/connect.c +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/connect.c @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/connect.c,v 1.55 2010/05/07 19:35:03 meskes Exp $ */ +/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/connect.c,v 1.56 2010/07/06 19:19:00 momjian Exp $ */ #define POSTGRES_ECPG_INTERNAL #include "postgres_fe.h" @@ -495,7 +495,7 @@ ECPGconnect(int lineno, int c, const char *name, const char *user, const char *p host ? "host=" : "", host ? host : "", port ? "port=" : "", port ? port : "", (user && strlen(user) > 0) ? "user=" : "", user ? user : "", - (passwd && strlen(passwd) > 0) ? "password=" : "", passwd ? passwd : "", + (passwd && strlen(passwd) > 0) ? "password=" : "", passwd ? passwd : "", options ? options : ""); /* diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/error.c b/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/error.c index 5451fd2981..a8f3b051ff 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/error.c +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/error.c @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/error.c,v 1.26 2010/05/08 16:39:52 tgl Exp $ */ +/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/error.c,v 1.27 2010/07/06 19:19:00 momjian Exp $ */ #define POSTGRES_ECPG_INTERNAL #include "postgres_fe.h" @@ -308,8 +308,10 @@ ecpg_raise_backend(int line, PGresult *result, PGconn *conn, int compat) if (strcmp(sqlstate, ECPG_SQLSTATE_ECPG_INTERNAL_ERROR) == 0) { - /* we might get here if the connection breaks down, so let's - * check for this instead of giving just the generic internal error */ + /* + * we might get here if the connection breaks down, so let's check for + * this instead of giving just the generic internal error + */ if (PQstatus(conn) == CONNECTION_BAD) { sqlstate = "57P02"; diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/execute.c b/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/execute.c index 868bc699b0..72eed58746 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/execute.c +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/execute.c @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/execute.c,v 1.97 2010/05/25 17:28:20 meskes Exp $ */ +/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/execute.c,v 1.98 2010/07/06 19:19:00 momjian Exp $ */ /* * The aim is to get a simpler inteface to the database routines. @@ -708,7 +708,7 @@ ecpg_store_input(const int lineno, const bool force_indicator, const struct vari strcpy(mallocedval, "array ["); for (element = 0; element < asize; element++) - sprintf(mallocedval + strlen(mallocedval), "%llu,", ((unsigned long long int*) var->value)[element]); + sprintf(mallocedval + strlen(mallocedval), "%llu,", ((unsigned long long int *) var->value)[element]); strcpy(mallocedval + strlen(mallocedval) - 1, "]"); } diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/misc.c b/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/misc.c index 6095c04b62..9a5dca763b 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/misc.c +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/misc.c @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/misc.c,v 1.58 2010/05/25 17:28:20 meskes Exp $ */ +/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/ecpglib/misc.c,v 1.59 2010/07/06 19:19:00 momjian Exp $ */ #define POSTGRES_ECPG_INTERNAL #include "postgres_fe.h" @@ -23,9 +23,9 @@ #define LONG_LONG_MIN LLONG_MIN #else #define LONG_LONG_MIN LONGLONG_MIN -#endif /* LLONG_MIN */ -#endif /* LONG_LONG_MIN */ -#endif /* HAVE_LONG_LONG_INT */ +#endif /* LLONG_MIN */ +#endif /* LONG_LONG_MIN */ +#endif /* HAVE_LONG_LONG_INT */ bool ecpg_internal_regression_mode = false; diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/preproc/ecpg.c b/src/interfaces/ecpg/preproc/ecpg.c index 3247e95982..db52bf5c20 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/preproc/ecpg.c +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/preproc/ecpg.c @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/preproc/ecpg.c,v 1.115 2010/04/03 19:30:49 meskes Exp $ */ +/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/preproc/ecpg.c,v 1.116 2010/07/06 19:19:00 momjian Exp $ */ /* Main for ecpg, the PostgreSQL embedded SQL precompiler. */ /* Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group */ @@ -469,6 +469,7 @@ main(int argc, char *const argv[]) fclose(yyin); if (out_option == 0 && yyout != stdout) fclose(yyout); + /* * If there was an error, delete the output file. */ diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/preproc/type.c b/src/interfaces/ecpg/preproc/type.c index 32fb144a70..eb7d4aeb9b 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/preproc/type.c +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/preproc/type.c @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/preproc/type.c,v 1.92 2010/04/03 07:53:29 petere Exp $ */ +/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/ecpg/preproc/type.c,v 1.93 2010/07/06 19:19:00 momjian Exp $ */ #include "postgres_fe.h" @@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ static void ECPGdump_a_struct(FILE *o, const char *name, const char *ind_name, c void ECPGdump_a_type(FILE *o, const char *name, struct ECPGtype * type, const int brace_level, - const char *ind_name, struct ECPGtype * ind_type, const int ind_brace_level, + const char *ind_name, struct ECPGtype * ind_type, const int ind_brace_level, const char *prefix, const char *ind_prefix, char *arr_str_siz, const char *struct_sizeof, const char *ind_struct_sizeof) diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/test/expected/preproc-outofscope.c b/src/interfaces/ecpg/test/expected/preproc-outofscope.c index d510eb0e03..e8c4f5c0b4 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/test/expected/preproc-outofscope.c +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/test/expected/preproc-outofscope.c @@ -100,61 +100,63 @@ int PGTYPESnumeric_from_decimal(decimal *, numeric *); #line 1 "struct.h" - - - - /* dec_t */ - - + + + + + /* dec_t */ + + typedef struct mytype MYTYPE ; -#line 9 "struct.h" +#line 10 "struct.h" - - - - - - + + + + + + + typedef struct mynulltype MYNULLTYPE ; -#line 18 "struct.h" +#line 20 "struct.h" #line 11 "outofscope.pgc" struct mytype { -#line 3 "struct.h" +#line 4 "struct.h" int id ; -#line 4 "struct.h" +#line 5 "struct.h" char t [ 64 ] ; -#line 5 "struct.h" +#line 6 "struct.h" double d1 ; -#line 6 "struct.h" +#line 7 "struct.h" double d2 ; -#line 7 "struct.h" +#line 8 "struct.h" char c [ 30 ] ; } ; struct mynulltype { -#line 12 "struct.h" +#line 14 "struct.h" int id ; -#line 13 "struct.h" +#line 15 "struct.h" int t ; -#line 14 "struct.h" +#line 16 "struct.h" int d1 ; -#line 15 "struct.h" +#line 17 "struct.h" int d2 ; -#line 16 "struct.h" +#line 18 "struct.h" int c ; } ;/* exec sql end declare section */ #line 12 "outofscope.pgc" diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/test/expected/preproc-strings.c b/src/interfaces/ecpg/test/expected/preproc-strings.c index dd13cf36cf..310dbb837e 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/test/expected/preproc-strings.c +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/test/expected/preproc-strings.c @@ -18,7 +18,12 @@ #line 3 "strings.pgc" /* exec sql begin declare section */ #line 1 "strings.h" - + + + + + + #line 5 "strings.pgc" diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/test/preproc/strings.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/test/preproc/strings.h index 4779af9881..07c04f9103 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/test/preproc/strings.h +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/test/preproc/strings.h @@ -1 +1,6 @@ -char *s1, *s2, *s3, *s4, *s5, *s6; +char *s1, + *s2, + *s3, + *s4, + *s5, + *s6; diff --git a/src/interfaces/ecpg/test/preproc/struct.h b/src/interfaces/ecpg/test/preproc/struct.h index cc4681b74f..75e802ac6f 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/ecpg/test/preproc/struct.h +++ b/src/interfaces/ecpg/test/preproc/struct.h @@ -1,18 +1,20 @@ -struct mytype { - int id; - char t[64]; - double d1; /* dec_t */ - double d2; - char c[30]; +struct mytype +{ + int id; + char t[64]; + double d1; /* dec_t */ + double d2; + char c[30]; }; typedef struct mytype MYTYPE; -struct mynulltype { - int id; - int t; - int d1; - int d2; - int c; +struct mynulltype +{ + int id; + int t; + int d1; + int d2; + int c; }; typedef struct mynulltype MYNULLTYPE; diff --git a/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-connect.c b/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-connect.c index 795b64e55b..2c8a059347 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-connect.c +++ b/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-connect.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-connect.c,v 1.394 2010/06/23 21:54:13 rhaas Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-connect.c,v 1.395 2010/07/06 19:19:00 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -184,16 +184,16 @@ static const PQconninfoOption PQconninfoOptions[] = { "Fallback-Application-Name", "", 64}, {"keepalives", NULL, NULL, NULL, - "TCP-Keepalives", "", 1}, /* should be just '0' or '1' */ + "TCP-Keepalives", "", 1}, /* should be just '0' or '1' */ {"keepalives_idle", NULL, NULL, NULL, - "TCP-Keepalives-Idle", "", 10}, /* strlen(INT32_MAX) == 10 */ + "TCP-Keepalives-Idle", "", 10}, /* strlen(INT32_MAX) == 10 */ {"keepalives_interval", NULL, NULL, NULL, "TCP-Keepalives-Interval", "", 10}, /* strlen(INT32_MAX) == 10 */ {"keepalives_count", NULL, NULL, NULL, - "TCP-Keepalives-Count", "", 10}, /* strlen(INT32_MAX) == 10 */ + "TCP-Keepalives-Count", "", 10}, /* strlen(INT32_MAX) == 10 */ #ifdef USE_SSL @@ -988,7 +988,7 @@ useKeepalives(PGconn *conn) static int setKeepalivesIdle(PGconn *conn) { - int idle; + int idle; if (conn->keepalives_idle == NULL) return 1; @@ -1001,10 +1001,10 @@ setKeepalivesIdle(PGconn *conn) if (setsockopt(conn->sock, IPPROTO_TCP, TCP_KEEPIDLE, (char *) &idle, sizeof(idle)) < 0) { - char sebuf[256]; + char sebuf[256]; appendPQExpBuffer(&conn->errorMessage, - libpq_gettext("setsockopt(TCP_KEEPIDLE) failed: %s\n"), + libpq_gettext("setsockopt(TCP_KEEPIDLE) failed: %s\n"), SOCK_STRERROR(SOCK_ERRNO, sebuf, sizeof(sebuf))); return 0; } @@ -1019,7 +1019,7 @@ setKeepalivesIdle(PGconn *conn) static int setKeepalivesInterval(PGconn *conn) { - int interval; + int interval; if (conn->keepalives_interval == NULL) return 1; @@ -1032,10 +1032,10 @@ setKeepalivesInterval(PGconn *conn) if (setsockopt(conn->sock, IPPROTO_TCP, TCP_KEEPINTVL, (char *) &interval, sizeof(interval)) < 0) { - char sebuf[256]; + char sebuf[256]; appendPQExpBuffer(&conn->errorMessage, - libpq_gettext("setsockopt(TCP_KEEPINTVL) failed: %s\n"), + libpq_gettext("setsockopt(TCP_KEEPINTVL) failed: %s\n"), SOCK_STRERROR(SOCK_ERRNO, sebuf, sizeof(sebuf))); return 0; } @@ -1051,7 +1051,7 @@ setKeepalivesInterval(PGconn *conn) static int setKeepalivesCount(PGconn *conn) { - int count; + int count; if (conn->keepalives_count == NULL) return 1; @@ -1064,10 +1064,10 @@ setKeepalivesCount(PGconn *conn) if (setsockopt(conn->sock, IPPROTO_TCP, TCP_KEEPCNT, (char *) &count, sizeof(count)) < 0) { - char sebuf[256]; + char sebuf[256]; appendPQExpBuffer(&conn->errorMessage, - libpq_gettext("setsockopt(TCP_KEEPCNT) failed: %s\n"), + libpq_gettext("setsockopt(TCP_KEEPCNT) failed: %s\n"), SOCK_STRERROR(SOCK_ERRNO, sebuf, sizeof(sebuf))); return 0; } @@ -1464,9 +1464,9 @@ keep_going: /* We will come back to here until there is if (!IS_AF_UNIX(addr_cur->ai_family)) { - int on = 1; - int usekeepalives = useKeepalives(conn); - int err = 0; + int on = 1; + int usekeepalives = useKeepalives(conn); + int err = 0; if (usekeepalives < 0) { @@ -1484,7 +1484,7 @@ keep_going: /* We will come back to here until there is { appendPQExpBuffer(&conn->errorMessage, libpq_gettext("setsockopt(SO_KEEPALIVE) failed: %s\n"), - SOCK_STRERROR(SOCK_ERRNO, sebuf, sizeof(sebuf))); + SOCK_STRERROR(SOCK_ERRNO, sebuf, sizeof(sebuf))); err = 1; } else if (!setKeepalivesIdle(conn) @@ -2313,7 +2313,7 @@ keep_going: /* We will come back to here until there is error_return: dot_pg_pass_warning(conn); - + /* * We used to close the socket at this point, but that makes it awkward * for those above us if they wish to remove this socket from their own @@ -4608,7 +4608,8 @@ PasswordFromFile(char *hostname, char *port, char *dbname, char *username) } -static bool getPgPassFilename(char *pgpassfile) +static bool +getPgPassFilename(char *pgpassfile) { char *passfile_env; @@ -4636,21 +4637,21 @@ dot_pg_pass_warning(PGconn *conn) { /* If it was 'invalid authorization', add .pgpass mention */ if (conn->dot_pgpass_used && conn->password_needed && conn->result && - /* only works with >= 9.0 servers */ + /* only works with >= 9.0 servers */ strcmp(PQresultErrorField(conn->result, PG_DIAG_SQLSTATE), - ERRCODE_INVALID_PASSWORD) == 0) + ERRCODE_INVALID_PASSWORD) == 0) { char pgpassfile[MAXPGPATH]; if (!getPgPassFilename(pgpassfile)) return; appendPQExpBuffer(&conn->errorMessage, - libpq_gettext("password retrieved from file \"%s\"\n"), + libpq_gettext("password retrieved from file \"%s\"\n"), pgpassfile); } } - + /* * Obtain user's home directory, return in given buffer * diff --git a/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-misc.c b/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-misc.c index f76168ccd4..0b189453dd 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-misc.c +++ b/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-misc.c @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-misc.c,v 1.143 2010/05/09 02:16:00 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-misc.c,v 1.144 2010/07/06 19:19:01 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -1095,11 +1095,11 @@ pqSocketPoll(int sock, int forRead, int forWrite, time_t end_time) FD_ZERO(&output_mask); FD_ZERO(&except_mask); if (forRead) - FD_SET (sock, &input_mask); + FD_SET(sock, &input_mask); if (forWrite) - FD_SET (sock, &output_mask); - FD_SET (sock, &except_mask); + FD_SET(sock, &output_mask); + FD_SET(sock, &except_mask); /* Compute appropriate timeout interval */ if (end_time == ((time_t) -1)) diff --git a/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-secure.c b/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-secure.c index a8acf4e5cb..9558010a81 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-secure.c +++ b/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-secure.c @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-secure.c,v 1.134 2010/05/26 21:39:27 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/libpq/fe-secure.c,v 1.135 2010/07/06 19:19:01 momjian Exp $ * * NOTES * @@ -810,7 +810,7 @@ destroy_ssl_system(void) * Initialize (potentially) per-connection SSL data, namely the * client certificate, private key, and trusted CA certs. * - * conn->ssl must already be created. It receives the connection's client + * conn->ssl must already be created. It receives the connection's client * certificate and private key. Note however that certificates also get * loaded into the SSL_context object, and are therefore accessible to all * connections in this process. This should be OK as long as there aren't @@ -859,8 +859,8 @@ initialize_SSL(PGconn *conn) { /* * If file is not present, just go on without a client cert; server - * might or might not accept the connection. Any other error, however, - * is grounds for complaint. + * might or might not accept the connection. Any other error, + * however, is grounds for complaint. */ if (errno != ENOENT) { @@ -875,14 +875,15 @@ initialize_SSL(PGconn *conn) { /* * Cert file exists, so load it. Since OpenSSL doesn't provide the - * equivalent of "SSL_use_certificate_chain_file", we actually have - * to load the file twice. The first call loads any extra certs - * after the first one into chain-cert storage associated with the - * SSL_context. The second call loads the first cert (only) into - * the SSL object, where it will be correctly paired with the private - * key we load below. We do it this way so that each connection - * understands which subject cert to present, in case different sslcert - * settings are used for different connections in the same process. + * equivalent of "SSL_use_certificate_chain_file", we actually have to + * load the file twice. The first call loads any extra certs after + * the first one into chain-cert storage associated with the + * SSL_context. The second call loads the first cert (only) into the + * SSL object, where it will be correctly paired with the private key + * we load below. We do it this way so that each connection + * understands which subject cert to present, in case different + * sslcert settings are used for different connections in the same + * process. */ if (SSL_CTX_use_certificate_chain_file(SSL_context, fnbuf) != 1) { @@ -994,7 +995,7 @@ initialize_SSL(PGconn *conn) * file */ } else -#endif /* USE_SSL_ENGINE */ +#endif /* USE_SSL_ENGINE */ { /* PGSSLKEY is not an engine, treat it as a filename */ strncpy(fnbuf, conn->sslkey, sizeof(fnbuf)); @@ -1110,7 +1111,7 @@ initialize_SSL(PGconn *conn) { /* * stat() failed; assume root file doesn't exist. If sslmode is - * verify-ca or verify-full, this is an error. Otherwise, continue + * verify-ca or verify-full, this is an error. Otherwise, continue * without performing any server cert verification. */ if (conn->sslmode[0] == 'v') /* "verify-ca" or "verify-full" */ diff --git a/src/interfaces/libpq/libpq-int.h b/src/interfaces/libpq/libpq-int.h index 23b914abbc..ca3497f8f7 100644 --- a/src/interfaces/libpq/libpq-int.h +++ b/src/interfaces/libpq/libpq-int.h @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * Portions Copyright (c) 1994, Regents of the University of California * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/libpq/libpq-int.h,v 1.151 2010/06/23 21:54:13 rhaas Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/interfaces/libpq/libpq-int.h,v 1.152 2010/07/06 19:19:01 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -302,8 +302,10 @@ struct pg_conn char *pgpass; char *keepalives; /* use TCP keepalives? */ char *keepalives_idle; /* time between TCP keepalives */ - char *keepalives_interval; /* time between TCP keepalive retransmits */ - char *keepalives_count; /* maximum number of TCP keepalive retransmits */ + char *keepalives_interval; /* time between TCP keepalive + * retransmits */ + char *keepalives_count; /* maximum number of TCP keepalive + * retransmits */ char *sslmode; /* SSL mode (require,prefer,allow,disable) */ char *sslkey; /* client key filename */ char *sslcert; /* client certificate filename */ diff --git a/src/pl/plperl/plperl.c b/src/pl/plperl/plperl.c index 7d62caa469..ff46d2c285 100644 --- a/src/pl/plperl/plperl.c +++ b/src/pl/plperl/plperl.c @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ /********************************************************************** * plperl.c - perl as a procedural language for PostgreSQL * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/pl/plperl/plperl.c,v 1.178 2010/06/29 04:12:47 petere Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/pl/plperl/plperl.c,v 1.179 2010/07/06 19:19:01 momjian Exp $ * **********************************************************************/ @@ -185,6 +185,7 @@ static void plperl_inline_callback(void *arg); static char *strip_trailing_ws(const char *msg); static OP *pp_require_safe(pTHX); static int restore_context(bool); + #ifdef WIN32 static char *setlocale_perl(int category, char *locale); #endif @@ -241,7 +242,8 @@ _PG_init(void) * * If initialization fails due to, e.g., plperl_init_interp() throwing an * exception, then we'll return here on the next usage and the user will - * get a rather cryptic: ERROR: attempt to redefine parameter "plperl.use_strict" + * get a rather cryptic: ERROR: attempt to redefine parameter + * "plperl.use_strict" */ static bool inited = false; HASHCTL hash_ctl; @@ -536,7 +538,6 @@ plperl_init_interp(void) STMT_START { \ if (saved != NULL) { setlocale_perl(name, saved); pfree(saved); } \ } STMT_END - #endif if (plperl_on_init) @@ -579,17 +580,19 @@ plperl_init_interp(void) /* * Record the original function for the 'require' and 'dofile' opcodes. - * (They share the same implementation.) Ensure it's used for new interpreters. + * (They share the same implementation.) Ensure it's used for new + * interpreters. */ if (!pp_require_orig) pp_require_orig = PL_ppaddr[OP_REQUIRE]; - else + else { PL_ppaddr[OP_REQUIRE] = pp_require_orig; - PL_ppaddr[OP_DOFILE] = pp_require_orig; + PL_ppaddr[OP_DOFILE] = pp_require_orig; } #ifdef PLPERL_ENABLE_OPMASK_EARLY + /* * For regression testing to prove that the PLC_PERLBOOT and PLC_TRUSTED * code doesn't even compile any unsafe ops. In future there may be a @@ -611,11 +614,11 @@ plperl_init_interp(void) errcontext("while running Perl initialization"))); #ifdef PLPERL_RESTORE_LOCALE - PLPERL_RESTORE_LOCALE(LC_COLLATE, save_collate); - PLPERL_RESTORE_LOCALE(LC_CTYPE, save_ctype); + PLPERL_RESTORE_LOCALE(LC_COLLATE, save_collate); + PLPERL_RESTORE_LOCALE(LC_CTYPE, save_ctype); PLPERL_RESTORE_LOCALE(LC_MONETARY, save_monetary); - PLPERL_RESTORE_LOCALE(LC_NUMERIC, save_numeric); - PLPERL_RESTORE_LOCALE(LC_TIME, save_time); + PLPERL_RESTORE_LOCALE(LC_NUMERIC, save_numeric); + PLPERL_RESTORE_LOCALE(LC_TIME, save_time); #endif return plperl; @@ -693,27 +696,27 @@ plperl_destroy_interp(PerlInterpreter **interp) static void plperl_trusted_init(void) { - HV *stash; - SV *sv; - char *key; - I32 klen; - + HV *stash; + SV *sv; + char *key; + I32 klen; + /* use original require while we set up */ PL_ppaddr[OP_REQUIRE] = pp_require_orig; PL_ppaddr[OP_DOFILE] = pp_require_orig; - + eval_pv(PLC_TRUSTED, FALSE); if (SvTRUE(ERRSV)) ereport(ERROR, (errmsg("%s", strip_trailing_ws(SvPV_nolen(ERRSV))), errcontext("while executing PLC_TRUSTED"))); - + if (GetDatabaseEncoding() == PG_UTF8) { /* - * Force loading of utf8 module now to prevent errors that can - * arise from the regex code later trying to load utf8 modules. - * See http://rt.perl.org/rt3/Ticket/Display.html?id=47576 + * Force loading of utf8 module now to prevent errors that can arise + * from the regex code later trying to load utf8 modules. See + * http://rt.perl.org/rt3/Ticket/Display.html?id=47576 */ eval_pv("my $a=chr(0x100); return $a =~ /\\xa9/i", FALSE); if (SvTRUE(ERRSV)) @@ -721,37 +724,37 @@ plperl_trusted_init(void) (errmsg("%s", strip_trailing_ws(SvPV_nolen(ERRSV))), errcontext("while executing utf8fix"))); } - + /* * Lock down the interpreter */ - + /* switch to the safe require/dofile opcode for future code */ PL_ppaddr[OP_REQUIRE] = pp_require_safe; - PL_ppaddr[OP_DOFILE] = pp_require_safe; - - /* - * prevent (any more) unsafe opcodes being compiled - * PL_op_mask is per interpreter, so this only needs to be set once + PL_ppaddr[OP_DOFILE] = pp_require_safe; + + /* + * prevent (any more) unsafe opcodes being compiled PL_op_mask is per + * interpreter, so this only needs to be set once */ PL_op_mask = plperl_opmask; - + /* delete the DynaLoader:: namespace so extensions can't be loaded */ stash = gv_stashpv("DynaLoader", GV_ADDWARN); hv_iterinit(stash); - while ((sv = hv_iternextsv(stash, &key, &klen))) + while ((sv = hv_iternextsv(stash, &key, &klen))) { if (!isGV_with_GP(sv) || !GvCV(sv)) continue; SvREFCNT_dec(GvCV(sv)); /* free the CV */ - GvCV(sv) = NULL; /* prevent call via GV */ + GvCV(sv) = NULL; /* prevent call via GV */ } hv_clear(stash); - + /* invalidate assorted caches */ ++PL_sub_generation; hv_clear(PL_stashcache); - + /* * Execute plperl.on_plperl_init in the locked-down interpreter */ @@ -762,7 +765,7 @@ plperl_trusted_init(void) ereport(ERROR, (errmsg("%s", strip_trailing_ws(SvPV_nolen(ERRSV))), errcontext("while executing plperl.on_plperl_init"))); - + } } @@ -1316,11 +1319,11 @@ plperl_create_sub(plperl_proc_desc *prodesc, char *s, Oid fn_oid) if (!subref) ereport(ERROR, - (errmsg("didn't get a CODE reference from compiling function \"%s\"", - prodesc->proname))); - + (errmsg("didn't get a CODE reference from compiling function \"%s\"", + prodesc->proname))); + prodesc->reference = subref; - + return; } @@ -3055,62 +3058,68 @@ plperl_inline_callback(void *arg) static char * setlocale_perl(int category, char *locale) { - char *RETVAL = setlocale(category, locale); - if (RETVAL) { + char *RETVAL = setlocale(category, locale); + + if (RETVAL) + { #ifdef USE_LOCALE_CTYPE - if (category == LC_CTYPE + if (category == LC_CTYPE #ifdef LC_ALL - || category == LC_ALL + || category == LC_ALL #endif - ) - { - char *newctype; + ) + { + char *newctype; + #ifdef LC_ALL - if (category == LC_ALL) - newctype = setlocale(LC_CTYPE, NULL); - else + if (category == LC_ALL) + newctype = setlocale(LC_CTYPE, NULL); + else #endif - newctype = RETVAL; - new_ctype(newctype); - } -#endif /* USE_LOCALE_CTYPE */ + newctype = RETVAL; + new_ctype(newctype); + } +#endif /* USE_LOCALE_CTYPE */ #ifdef USE_LOCALE_COLLATE - if (category == LC_COLLATE + if (category == LC_COLLATE #ifdef LC_ALL - || category == LC_ALL + || category == LC_ALL #endif - ) - { - char *newcoll; + ) + { + char *newcoll; + #ifdef LC_ALL - if (category == LC_ALL) - newcoll = setlocale(LC_COLLATE, NULL); - else + if (category == LC_ALL) + newcoll = setlocale(LC_COLLATE, NULL); + else #endif - newcoll = RETVAL; - new_collate(newcoll); - } -#endif /* USE_LOCALE_COLLATE */ + newcoll = RETVAL; + new_collate(newcoll); + } +#endif /* USE_LOCALE_COLLATE */ #ifdef USE_LOCALE_NUMERIC - if (category == LC_NUMERIC + if (category == LC_NUMERIC #ifdef LC_ALL - || category == LC_ALL + || category == LC_ALL #endif - ) - { - char *newnum; + ) + { + char *newnum; + #ifdef LC_ALL - if (category == LC_ALL) - newnum = setlocale(LC_NUMERIC, NULL); - else + if (category == LC_ALL) + newnum = setlocale(LC_NUMERIC, NULL); + else #endif - newnum = RETVAL; - new_numeric(newnum); - } -#endif /* USE_LOCALE_NUMERIC */ - } + newnum = RETVAL; + new_numeric(newnum); + } +#endif /* USE_LOCALE_NUMERIC */ + } - return RETVAL; + return RETVAL; } + #endif diff --git a/src/pl/plpgsql/src/pl_exec.c b/src/pl/plpgsql/src/pl_exec.c index d1af4a6e5f..e1f48e3d75 100644 --- a/src/pl/plpgsql/src/pl_exec.c +++ b/src/pl/plpgsql/src/pl_exec.c @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ * * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/pl/plpgsql/src/pl_exec.c,v 1.260 2010/07/05 09:27:18 heikki Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/pl/plpgsql/src/pl_exec.c,v 1.261 2010/07/06 19:19:01 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -1899,7 +1899,7 @@ exec_stmt_forc(PLpgSQL_execstate *estate, PLpgSQL_stmt_forc *stmt) { PLpgSQL_var *curvar; char *curname = NULL; - const char *portalname; + const char *portalname; PLpgSQL_expr *query; ParamListInfo paramLI; Portal portal; @@ -3035,8 +3035,8 @@ exec_stmt_dynexecute(PLpgSQL_execstate *estate, if (*ptr == 'S' || *ptr == 's') ereport(ERROR, (errcode(ERRCODE_FEATURE_NOT_SUPPORTED), - errmsg("EXECUTE of SELECT ... INTO is not implemented"), - errhint("You might want to use EXECUTE ... INTO instead."))); + errmsg("EXECUTE of SELECT ... INTO is not implemented"), + errhint("You might want to use EXECUTE ... INTO instead."))); break; } @@ -4292,8 +4292,8 @@ exec_for_query(PLpgSQL_execstate *estate, PLpgSQL_stmt_forq *stmt, elog(ERROR, "unsupported target"); /* - * Make sure the portal doesn't get closed by the user statements - * we execute. + * Make sure the portal doesn't get closed by the user statements we + * execute. */ PinPortal(portal); diff --git a/src/pl/plpython/plpython.c b/src/pl/plpython/plpython.c index 8877809220..d63ba4a40c 100644 --- a/src/pl/plpython/plpython.c +++ b/src/pl/plpython/plpython.c @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ /********************************************************************** * plpython.c - python as a procedural language for PostgreSQL * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/pl/plpython/plpython.c,v 1.145 2010/06/29 00:18:11 petere Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/pl/plpython/plpython.c,v 1.146 2010/07/06 19:19:01 momjian Exp $ * ********************************************************************* */ @@ -3013,7 +3013,7 @@ PLy_spi_execute_plan(PyObject *ob, PyObject *list, long limit) PG_TRY(); { plan->values[j] = - plan->args[j].out.d.func(NULL, &(plan->args[j].out.d), elem); + plan->args[j].out.d.func(NULL, &(plan->args[j].out.d), elem); } PG_CATCH(); { diff --git a/src/pl/tcl/pltcl.c b/src/pl/tcl/pltcl.c index f0a70c8da6..1d0d04d3d7 100644 --- a/src/pl/tcl/pltcl.c +++ b/src/pl/tcl/pltcl.c @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ * pltcl.c - PostgreSQL support for Tcl as * procedural language (PL) * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/pl/tcl/pltcl.c,v 1.133 2010/05/13 18:29:12 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/pl/tcl/pltcl.c,v 1.134 2010/07/06 19:19:01 momjian Exp $ * **********************************************************************/ @@ -462,7 +462,7 @@ pltcl_init_load_unknown(Tcl_Interp *interp) buflen = strlen(pmrelname) + 100; buf = (char *) palloc(buflen); snprintf(buf, buflen, - "select modsrc from %s where modname = 'unknown' order by modseq", + "select modsrc from %s where modname = 'unknown' order by modseq", pmrelname); spi_rc = SPI_execute(buf, false, 0); diff --git a/src/port/crypt.c b/src/port/crypt.c index 920ab932a5..85b98c5704 100644 --- a/src/port/crypt.c +++ b/src/port/crypt.c @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/port/crypt.c,v 1.16 2009/06/11 14:49:15 momjian Exp $ */ +/* $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/port/crypt.c,v 1.17 2010/07/06 19:19:01 momjian Exp $ */ /* $NetBSD: crypt.c,v 1.18 2001/03/01 14:37:35 wiz Exp $ */ /* @@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ typedef union #if defined(B64) B64 b64; #endif -} C_block; +} C_block; /* * Convert twenty-four-bit long in host-order diff --git a/src/port/dirmod.c b/src/port/dirmod.c index c85064b652..d47c03e445 100644 --- a/src/port/dirmod.c +++ b/src/port/dirmod.c @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ * Win32 (NT4 and newer). * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/port/dirmod.c,v 1.62 2010/04/02 15:21:20 mha Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/port/dirmod.c,v 1.63 2010/07/06 19:19:01 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ typedef struct WORD PrintNameOffset; WORD PrintNameLength; WCHAR PathBuffer[1]; -} REPARSE_JUNCTION_DATA_BUFFER; +} REPARSE_JUNCTION_DATA_BUFFER; #define REPARSE_JUNCTION_DATA_BUFFER_HEADER_SIZE \ FIELD_OFFSET(REPARSE_JUNCTION_DATA_BUFFER, SubstituteNameOffset) diff --git a/src/port/pipe.c b/src/port/pipe.c index 474c169db1..4d04ba9da4 100644 --- a/src/port/pipe.c +++ b/src/port/pipe.c @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ * must be replaced with recv/send. * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/port/pipe.c,v 1.16 2010/01/02 16:58:13 momjian Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/port/pipe.c,v 1.17 2010/07/06 19:19:01 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ pgpipe(int handles[2]) serv_addr.sin_family = AF_INET; serv_addr.sin_port = htons(0); serv_addr.sin_addr.s_addr = htonl(INADDR_LOOPBACK); - if (bind(s, (SOCKADDR *) &serv_addr, len) == SOCKET_ERROR) + if (bind(s, (SOCKADDR *) & serv_addr, len) == SOCKET_ERROR) { ereport(LOG, (errmsg_internal("pgpipe failed to bind: %ui", WSAGetLastError()))); closesocket(s); @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ pgpipe(int handles[2]) closesocket(s); return -1; } - if (getsockname(s, (SOCKADDR *) &serv_addr, &len) == SOCKET_ERROR) + if (getsockname(s, (SOCKADDR *) & serv_addr, &len) == SOCKET_ERROR) { ereport(LOG, (errmsg_internal("pgpipe failed to getsockname: %ui", WSAGetLastError()))); closesocket(s); @@ -62,13 +62,13 @@ pgpipe(int handles[2]) return -1; } - if (connect(handles[1], (SOCKADDR *) &serv_addr, len) == SOCKET_ERROR) + if (connect(handles[1], (SOCKADDR *) & serv_addr, len) == SOCKET_ERROR) { ereport(LOG, (errmsg_internal("pgpipe failed to connect socket: %ui", WSAGetLastError()))); closesocket(s); return -1; } - if ((handles[0] = accept(s, (SOCKADDR *) &serv_addr, &len)) == INVALID_SOCKET) + if ((handles[0] = accept(s, (SOCKADDR *) & serv_addr, &len)) == INVALID_SOCKET) { ereport(LOG, (errmsg_internal("pgpipe failed to accept socket: %ui", WSAGetLastError()))); closesocket(handles[1]); diff --git a/src/port/snprintf.c b/src/port/snprintf.c index 3ccac709e1..b111f9707d 100644 --- a/src/port/snprintf.c +++ b/src/port/snprintf.c @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF * SUCH DAMAGE. * - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/port/snprintf.c,v 1.35 2008/03/18 01:49:44 tgl Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/port/snprintf.c,v 1.36 2010/07/06 19:19:01 momjian Exp $ */ #include "c.h" @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ typedef struct /* bufend == NULL is for sprintf, where we assume buf is big enough */ FILE *stream; /* eventual output destination, or NULL */ int nchars; /* # chars already sent to stream */ -} PrintfTarget; +} PrintfTarget; /* * Info about the type and value of a formatting parameter. Note that we @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ typedef enum ATYPE_LONGLONG, ATYPE_DOUBLE, ATYPE_CHARPTR -} PrintfArgType; +} PrintfArgType; typedef union { @@ -133,11 +133,11 @@ typedef union int64 ll; double d; char *cptr; -} PrintfArgValue; +} PrintfArgValue; -static void flushbuffer(PrintfTarget *target); -static int dopr(PrintfTarget *target, const char *format, va_list args); +static void flushbuffer(PrintfTarget * target); +static int dopr(PrintfTarget * target, const char *format, va_list args); int @@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ pg_printf(const char *fmt,...) /* call this only when stream is defined */ static void -flushbuffer(PrintfTarget *target) +flushbuffer(PrintfTarget * target) { size_t nc = target->bufptr - target->bufstart; @@ -268,29 +268,29 @@ flushbuffer(PrintfTarget *target) static void fmtstr(char *value, int leftjust, int minlen, int maxwidth, - int pointflag, PrintfTarget *target); -static void fmtptr(void *value, PrintfTarget *target); + int pointflag, PrintfTarget * target); +static void fmtptr(void *value, PrintfTarget * target); static void fmtint(int64 value, char type, int forcesign, int leftjust, int minlen, int zpad, int precision, int pointflag, - PrintfTarget *target); -static void fmtchar(int value, int leftjust, int minlen, PrintfTarget *target); + PrintfTarget * target); +static void fmtchar(int value, int leftjust, int minlen, PrintfTarget * target); static void fmtfloat(double value, char type, int forcesign, int leftjust, int minlen, int zpad, int precision, int pointflag, - PrintfTarget *target); -static void dostr(const char *str, int slen, PrintfTarget *target); -static void dopr_outch(int c, PrintfTarget *target); + PrintfTarget * target); +static void dostr(const char *str, int slen, PrintfTarget * target); +static void dopr_outch(int c, PrintfTarget * target); static int adjust_sign(int is_negative, int forcesign, int *signvalue); static void adjust_padlen(int minlen, int vallen, int leftjust, int *padlen); static void leading_pad(int zpad, int *signvalue, int *padlen, - PrintfTarget *target); -static void trailing_pad(int *padlen, PrintfTarget *target); + PrintfTarget * target); +static void trailing_pad(int *padlen, PrintfTarget * target); /* * dopr(): poor man's version of doprintf */ static int -dopr(PrintfTarget *target, const char *format, va_list args) +dopr(PrintfTarget * target, const char *format, va_list args) { const char *format_start = format; int ch; @@ -764,7 +764,7 @@ pg_strnlen(const char *str, size_t maxlen) static void fmtstr(char *value, int leftjust, int minlen, int maxwidth, - int pointflag, PrintfTarget *target) + int pointflag, PrintfTarget * target) { int padlen, vallen; /* amount to pad */ @@ -792,7 +792,7 @@ fmtstr(char *value, int leftjust, int minlen, int maxwidth, } static void -fmtptr(void *value, PrintfTarget *target) +fmtptr(void *value, PrintfTarget * target) { int vallen; char convert[64]; @@ -806,7 +806,7 @@ fmtptr(void *value, PrintfTarget *target) static void fmtint(int64 value, char type, int forcesign, int leftjust, int minlen, int zpad, int precision, int pointflag, - PrintfTarget *target) + PrintfTarget * target) { uint64 base; int dosign; @@ -883,7 +883,7 @@ fmtint(int64 value, char type, int forcesign, int leftjust, } static void -fmtchar(int value, int leftjust, int minlen, PrintfTarget *target) +fmtchar(int value, int leftjust, int minlen, PrintfTarget * target) { int padlen = 0; /* amount to pad */ @@ -903,7 +903,7 @@ fmtchar(int value, int leftjust, int minlen, PrintfTarget *target) static void fmtfloat(double value, char type, int forcesign, int leftjust, int minlen, int zpad, int precision, int pointflag, - PrintfTarget *target) + PrintfTarget * target) { int signvalue = 0; int vallen; @@ -932,7 +932,7 @@ fmtfloat(double value, char type, int forcesign, int leftjust, } static void -dostr(const char *str, int slen, PrintfTarget *target) +dostr(const char *str, int slen, PrintfTarget * target) { while (slen > 0) { @@ -959,7 +959,7 @@ dostr(const char *str, int slen, PrintfTarget *target) } static void -dopr_outch(int c, PrintfTarget *target) +dopr_outch(int c, PrintfTarget * target) { if (target->bufend != NULL && target->bufptr >= target->bufend) { @@ -998,7 +998,7 @@ adjust_padlen(int minlen, int vallen, int leftjust, int *padlen) static void -leading_pad(int zpad, int *signvalue, int *padlen, PrintfTarget *target) +leading_pad(int zpad, int *signvalue, int *padlen, PrintfTarget * target) { if (*padlen > 0 && zpad) { @@ -1031,7 +1031,7 @@ leading_pad(int zpad, int *signvalue, int *padlen, PrintfTarget *target) static void -trailing_pad(int *padlen, PrintfTarget *target) +trailing_pad(int *padlen, PrintfTarget * target) { while (*padlen < 0) { diff --git a/src/test/examples/testlibpq2.c b/src/test/examples/testlibpq2.c index f6c3dbd49d..c5921a5645 100644 --- a/src/test/examples/testlibpq2.c +++ b/src/test/examples/testlibpq2.c @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ /* - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/test/examples/testlibpq2.c,v 1.16 2009/12/31 00:16:47 adunstan Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/test/examples/testlibpq2.c,v 1.17 2010/07/06 19:19:01 momjian Exp $ * * * testlibpq2.c @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ main(int argc, char **argv) break; /* shouldn't happen */ FD_ZERO(&input_mask); - FD_SET (sock, &input_mask); + FD_SET(sock, &input_mask); if (select(sock + 1, &input_mask, NULL, NULL, NULL) < 0) { diff --git a/src/timezone/pgtz.c b/src/timezone/pgtz.c index 863f6bf2d3..b29a781cf8 100644 --- a/src/timezone/pgtz.c +++ b/src/timezone/pgtz.c @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ * Portions Copyright (c) 1996-2010, PostgreSQL Global Development Group * * IDENTIFICATION - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/timezone/pgtz.c,v 1.73 2010/05/20 14:13:11 mha Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/timezone/pgtz.c,v 1.74 2010/07/06 19:19:01 momjian Exp $ * *------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ @@ -501,7 +501,7 @@ identify_system_timezone(void) (errmsg("could not determine system time zone"), errdetail("The PostgreSQL time zone will be set to \"%s\".", "GMT"), - errhint("You can specify the correct timezone in postgresql.conf."))); + errhint("You can specify the correct timezone in postgresql.conf."))); return NULL; /* go to GMT */ } @@ -538,7 +538,7 @@ identify_system_timezone(void) (errmsg("could not recognize system time zone"), errdetail("The PostgreSQL time zone will be set to \"%s\".", resultbuf), - errhint("You can specify the correct timezone in postgresql.conf."))); + errhint("You can specify the correct timezone in postgresql.conf."))); return resultbuf; } @@ -1080,10 +1080,10 @@ identify_system_timezone(void) if (!tm) { ereport(LOG, - (errmsg("could not identify system time zone: localtime() failed"), - errdetail("The PostgreSQL time zone will be set to \"%s\".", - "GMT"), - errhint("You can specify the correct timezone in postgresql.conf."))); + (errmsg("could not identify system time zone: localtime() failed"), + errdetail("The PostgreSQL time zone will be set to \"%s\".", + "GMT"), + errhint("You can specify the correct timezone in postgresql.conf."))); return NULL; /* go to GMT */ } @@ -1118,7 +1118,7 @@ identify_system_timezone(void) (int) GetLastError()), errdetail("The PostgreSQL time zone will be set to \"%s\".", "GMT"), - errhint("You can specify the correct timezone in postgresql.conf."))); + errhint("You can specify the correct timezone in postgresql.conf."))); return NULL; /* go to GMT */ } @@ -1164,7 +1164,7 @@ identify_system_timezone(void) (errmsg_internal("could not query value for key \"std\" to identify system time zone \"%s\": %i", keyname, (int) r))); RegCloseKey(key); - continue; /* Proceed to look at the next timezone */ + continue; /* Proceed to look at the next timezone */ } if (strcmp(tzname, zonename) == 0) { @@ -1181,7 +1181,7 @@ identify_system_timezone(void) (errmsg_internal("could not query value for key \"dlt\" to identify system time zone \"%s\": %i", keyname, (int) r))); RegCloseKey(key); - continue; /* Proceed to look at the next timezone */ + continue; /* Proceed to look at the next timezone */ } if (strcmp(tzname, zonename) == 0) { @@ -1216,8 +1216,8 @@ identify_system_timezone(void) tzname), errdetail("The PostgreSQL time zone will be set to \"%s\".", "GMT"), - errhint("You can specify the correct timezone in postgresql.conf."))); - return NULL; /* go to GMT */ + errhint("You can specify the correct timezone in postgresql.conf."))); + return NULL; /* go to GMT */ } #endif /* WIN32 */ @@ -1554,7 +1554,7 @@ pg_tzenumerate_next(pg_tzenum *dir) /* Step into the subdirectory */ if (dir->depth >= MAX_TZDIR_DEPTH - 1) ereport(ERROR, - (errmsg_internal("timezone directory stack overflow"))); + (errmsg_internal("timezone directory stack overflow"))); dir->depth++; dir->dirname[dir->depth] = pstrdup(fullname); dir->dirdesc[dir->depth] = AllocateDir(fullname); diff --git a/src/tools/fsync/test_fsync.c b/src/tools/fsync/test_fsync.c index 7929915282..c237096717 100644 --- a/src/tools/fsync/test_fsync.c +++ b/src/tools/fsync/test_fsync.c @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ /* - * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/tools/fsync/test_fsync.c,v 1.29 2010/07/04 13:42:51 momjian Exp $ + * $PostgreSQL: pgsql/src/tools/fsync/test_fsync.c,v 1.30 2010/07/06 19:19:02 momjian Exp $ * * * test_fsync.c @@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ #define LABEL_FORMAT "\t%-30s" -int loops = 10000; +int loops = 10000; void die(char *str); void print_elapse(struct timeval start_t, struct timeval stop_t); @@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ main(int argc, char *argv[]) * Fsync another file descriptor? */ printf("\nTest if fsync on non-write file descriptor is honored:\n"); - printf("(If the times are similar, fsync() can sync data written\n"); + printf("(If the times are similar, fsync() can sync data written\n"); printf("on a different descriptor.)\n"); /* write, fsync, close */ @@ -368,11 +368,11 @@ main(int argc, char *argv[]) void print_elapse(struct timeval start_t, struct timeval stop_t) { - double total_time = (stop_t.tv_sec - start_t.tv_sec) + + double total_time = (stop_t.tv_sec - start_t.tv_sec) + /* usec subtraction might be negative, e.g. 5.4 - 4.8 */ - (stop_t.tv_usec - start_t.tv_usec) * 0.000001; - double per_second = loops / total_time; - + (stop_t.tv_usec - start_t.tv_usec) * 0.000001; + double per_second = loops / total_time; + printf("%9.3f/second\n", per_second); } |